学习手册Unit6 Good manners(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

“Xuan哒哒哒”通过精心收集，向本站投稿了20篇学习手册Unit6 Good manners(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)，下面就是小编给大家带来的学习手册Unit6 Good manners(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)，希望大家喜欢阅读!

篇1：学习手册Unit6 Good manners(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

=●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

manner,apologize,interrupt,forgive,mean,fault,pay a visit to,culture,for the first time,behave,

impression,unfold,custom,serve，course,toast,fashion,polite,provide,place(vt.),close to,start with,drink to one's health

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

That's/It's OK.

No problem.

Excuse me,may I interrupt you for a moment?

What is it?

I'm terribly sorry.

Forgive me.

I apologize for taking the bike without telling you.

I didn't mean to interrupt you.

Ⅲ.语法

学习限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句的区别。

●学习障碍

Ⅰ.单词及短语

manner,interrupt,mean,fault,pay a visit to,behave,impression,serve,provide,close to

Ⅱ.语法

非限制性定语从句与限制性定语从句的区别。

●学习策略

Ⅰ.单词及短语部分

1.manner n.

纵向归纳法：

（1）方式 Do it in a business manner.

（2）态度 She has a friendly manner.

（3）manners 礼貌 It's bad manners to stare at people.

联系语境法：

I don't object to（反对）what he says,but I strongly dislike the ________ he says it.

A.way B.manners

答案：A 指“方式”，可用way或manner。复数manners，表示“礼貌”。

2.interrupt v.

纵向归纳法：

(1)中断 He interrupted his work to answer the bell.

(2)打断（某人）讲话 Don't interrupt(me) while I'm busy.

横向比较法：

disturb vt.

(1)打扰 May I disturb you for a moment?

(2)弄乱 A light wind disturbed the surface of the water.

联系语境法：

用interrupt或disturb填空

(1)It's not polite to________a speaker.

(2)I don't wish to________while doing homework.

(3)Someone has________all my papers.

答案：（1）interrupt (2)be disturbed (3)disturb

3.mean v.

纵向归纳法：

(1)mean to do 打算做某事

Sorry,I didn't mean to hurt you.

(2)mean doing 意味着

The new order will mean (us) working overtime.

横向比较法：

(1)stop/go on to do停下来/继续做另一件事

stop/go on doing停下来/继续做一件事

(2)try to do设法做/努力（表目的）

try doing试着做/尝试（表方式）

(3)remember/forget/regret to do

记得/忘记/遗憾做某事（事情还没做）

remember/forget/regret doing记得/忘记/后悔做过某事

(4)can't help(to)do不能帮助做某事

can't help doing情不自禁做某事

联系语境法：

(1)-The light in the office is still on.

-Oh,I forgot________.

A.turn it off B.to turn it off

C.turning it off D.having turned it off

(2)Having finished the book,the writer tried________a publisher.

A.finding B.to find C.finish D.found

答案：（1）B （2）B

4.fault n.

纵向归纳法：

（1）错（误）There're many faults in the book.

（2）缺点，毛病 Every man has his faults.

（3）at fault有错，有毛-

The boys are not at fault in this case.

横向比较法：

mistake

(1)n.错误

The teacher found several spelling mistakes in his article.

(2)make a mistake犯错

We all make mistakes.

（3）by mistake错误地，无心（做了某事）

I took your umbrella by mistake.

（4）v.弄错，误会

He's mistaken the address,and gone to the wrong house.

(5)mistake…for…错把……当作……

I mistook you for your brother.

联系语境法：

用fault或mistake或相关词组填空：

（1）She believed the________lay with him.

(2)She put salt in her cup of tea________.

答案：(1)fault。“fault”表示“错误”时，强调是某人犯的错误或责任。（2）by mistake 5.behave v.

纵向归纳法：

(1)behave well,badly(toward sb.)（举止或行为）表现（好/不好）

She behaves (toward me) more like a friend than a teacher.

(2)behave oneself表现良好

Children,please behave yourselves!

(3)behaviour n.待人态度，行为方式

击破定式法：

改错：He is a good-behaved boy.

答案：应改为well-behaved。behaved与副词构成合成形容词。此处well修饰behaved,而不是修饰boy。又如：a newly-built museum。

6.impression n.印象

纵向归纳法：

（1）impression (on sb.)（给某人）印象

His speech made a strong impression on his audience.

（2）impression(of sth.)（对某事物）印象，想法

That's my first impression of the new college.

(3)impress v.

impress sb.with sth.给予某人深刻印象

The sights of the city never fail to impress foreign tourists.

impress sth.on sb.使某人铭记

The teacher impressed on his students the importance of speaking.

联系语境法：

Her beauty is most________.

A.impress B.impression C.impressive

答案：C 此处不需要动词或名词。impressive是形容词，表示给人印象深刻的。

7.provide v.提供

纵向归纳法：

(1)provide sb.with sth.

Agriculture provides industry with raw material and market.

provide sth.to sb.

Could you provide accomodation(住宿)to 30 people?

(2)provide for sb.养活

I have no worries,only myself to provide for.

(3)provide for sth.为（可能的困难）做准备

He worked hard to provide for his old age.

横向比较法：

(1)supply v.供给，供应

supply sb.with sth.

supply sth.to sb.

In Britain milk is supplied to each house in bottles. n.供给（物品），贮备

Have we got enough supplies of coal?

in short supply供应不足

(2)offer v.(主动）提出（给予/做某事）

offer sth.to sb.

offer sb.sth.

I've been offered a job in Japan.

offer to do sth.

He offered to drive us home,but we preferred to walk.

联系语境法：

用offer,supply,provide的适当形式填空：

（1)He________for his family by working in a bookshop.

(2)The water________here is good.

(3)They________him a lift,but he didn't accept.

答案：(1)provided。provide for表示“供养”。

（2）supply。此处为名词，表示“供应”。

（3）offered。表示主动提出（供人接受或拒绝）。

8.serve v.

纵向归纳法：

（1）为……服务/工作

A slave serves his master.

（2）接待（顾客）

The shop assistant is serving a customer.

（3）侍候吃饭，端（菜）

Lunch is served now.

（4）serve as充任（某职务）作……用

She served as a model for several painters.

This box will serve as/for a seat.

（5）serving n.一份食物

This will be enough for 4 servings.

servant n.仆人，公仆

This mayor is a public servant.

service n.服务

His whole life was devoted to(奉献给) the service of others.

击破定式法：

改错：We should serve for the people heart and soul.

答案：去掉for。serve表示“为某人服务”，直接加宾语。

Ⅱ.语法部分

限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句的区别

纵向归纳法：

1.限制性定语从句是先行词不可缺少的定语，如果省去，主句的意思就不完整或不明确。非限制性定语从句只是对先行词作附加说明，如果省去，主句的意思仍然清楚。

2.限制性定语从句与主句之间不能用逗号分开；非限制性定语从句与主句之间要用逗号分开。

The film which was shown just now is very exciting.(限制）

We saw an exciting film, which is about how people fight against pollution.(非限制）

试比较：

3.限制性定语从句可以用that引导；非限制性定语从句不用that引导，应用which。

That is the interesting novel that/which you are eager to read.

I read an interesting novel, which was about the Long March.

4.限制性定语从句的关系代词作宾语时可省略。

非限制性定语从句的关系代词作宾语时则不能省略，介词后的关系代词也不能省略。

I will never forget the days(that,which) we spent together.

He is the man(whom/that)you can turn to for advice.

He is the man to whom you can turn for help.(不能省）

His mother, whom he loved dearly,died in 1818.(不能省）

5.限制性定语从句一般只修饰先行词；非限制性定语从句可以修饰先行词，也可以修饰其前面的整个句子或句子的一部分。

I have finished the novel that you lent me yesterday.

She failed in the exam again, which made her mother very angry.

He will made a trip to Suzhou, which is famous for its beautiful scenery.

●方法实践

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.-Hey,look where you're going!

-Oh,________.

A.I'm not noticing B.that's all right C.I don't mean to do it D.I'm terribly sorry

2.When I caught him cheating me I stopped________things in his shop.

A.buying B.buy

C.to buy D.bought

3.Mr Full apologized________the children________the lady________what they had done.

A.for;to;to B.to;to;for

C.for;to;for D.to;for;for

4.You made the same mistake for________second time,dropping________“n” in the word “government”.

A.for;to;to B.a;the

C.a;a D.the;an

5.-This dialogue should________a question,not a puzzle.

-I am________. A.have started with;to blame B.start with;to be blamed

C.have started from;to blame D.start from;to be blamed

6.His parents meant him________scientific research,but he showed no interest and turned poet. A.going in for B.to have gone in for

C.to go in for D.having gone in for

7.In salad bars the waiter doesn't bring you salad.You have to________yourself,usually to as much as you want.

A.bring B.serve

C.help D.supply

8.A thousand miles no longer________to us today,for modern transportation can easily get us________this distance.

A.mean much;to B.means many;over

C.meant more;by D.means much;over

9.However,at times this balance in nature is________,resulting in a number of possibly unseen effects.

A.disturbed B.troubled

C.puzzled D.mixed

10.-You've given us a wonderful meal,Mrs Jackson.

-________.I'm glad you enjoy it.

A.Not at all B.I don't think so myself

C.Thanks a lot D.No,just so-so

11.-Why didn't you give me a ring?

-Well,I meant________,but later I forgot.

A.telephoning B.to telephone

C.having telephoned D.telephoned

12.Be quiet!It's rude to________people when they are talking.

A.stop B.introduce

C.prevent D.interrupt

13.The words of his old teacher left a________impression on his mind.He is still affected by them.

A.lasting B.lively

C.long D.real

14.While shopping,people sometimes can't help________into buying something they don't really need.

A.to persuade B.persuading

C.being persuaded D.be persuaded

15.-I must apologize for________ahead of time.

-That's all right.

A.letting you not know B.not letting you know

C.letting you know not D.letting not you know

16.I regret________you that I won't go to help you next week.

A.for telling B.telling

C.to tell D.told

17.-You were brave enough to raise objections at the meeting.

-Well,now I regret________that.

A.to do B.to be doing

C.to have done D.having done

18.We'll have the discussion in the garden________the hall.

A.instead of B.instead in

C.instead of in D.instead

19.The old woman is sitting________her daughter.

A.near to B.next

C.next by D.close to

20.He promised to drop in________the Smiths sometime next month.

A.to B.in

C.on D.for

21.My parents always let me have my own________of living.

A.way B.method

C.manner D.fashion

22.All the rooms are________with electric light.

A.supplied B.given

C.offered D.burnt

23.-Car 17 won the race.

-Yes,but its driver came close to________.

A.having killed B.have been killed

B.be killed D.being killed

24.-You should have thanked her before you left.

-I meant________,but when I was leaving I couldn't find her anywhere.

A.to do B.to

C.doing D.doing so

25.-I usually go there by train.

-Why not________by boat for a change? A.to try going B.trying to go

C.to try and go D.try going

Ⅱ.完形填空

It was 11:30 in the evening.A 1 American lady of about seventy was standing on the side of an Alabama 2 trying to bear a pouring rainstorm.Her car had 3 and at the moment she 4 needed a ride.Wet to the skin,she decided to flag down the next 5 .A young white man stopped to help her-generally unheard 6 in those conflict-filled（矛盾冲突）1960s.The man 7 her to safety in his car,and 8 a taxicab(a kind of car)for her.She seemed to be in a great 9 .She wrote down his 10 ,thanked him and drove away.Several days went by and a 11 came on the man's door.To his 12 ,a very big color TV was delivered to his home.A special note was 13 to it.It read:“Dear sir,thank yu so much for assisting a(an) 14 coloured woman on the freeway 15 night.The rain 16 wet all over not only my clothes 17 my spirits.Then you 18 along.Because of you,I was 19 to make it to my dying husband's bedside just 20 he passed away.God bless you for helping me and kindly serving others.Sincerely,Mrs.Nat King Cole.”

1.A.black B.white

C.poor D.sick

2.A.railway B.freeway

C.street D.avenue

3.A.broken up B.speeded up

C.broken down D.slowed down

4.A.seriously B.badly

C.fairly D.probably

5.A.bus B.truck

C.taxi D.car

6.A.from B.by

C.before D.of

7.A.put B.led

C.fetched D.took

8.A.hired B.took

C.sent D.asked

9.A.need B.help

C.hurry D.trouble

10.A.address B.number

C.name D.words

11.A.lady B.salesman

C.letter D.knock

12.A.surprise B.delight

C.joy D.satisfaction

13.A.offered B.given

C.stuck D.written

14.A.aged B.dark

C.lucky D.unhappy

15.A.another B.the other

C.other D.any

16.A.let B.made

C.had D.turned

17.A.and B.but

C.or D.otherwise

18.A.got B.went

C.ran D.came

19.A.able B.ready

C.likely D.willing

20.A.after B.before

C.until D.since

Ⅲ.短文改错

Sometimes we have difficulties in remembering the names 1.________

of the months in English.If we will know something of 2.________

the history of this names,possibly they will not seem 3.________

so difficult for us to remember.The following is two 4.________

examples.January named after the god Janus,Janus was a 5.________

strange god with two faces.He could look at two 6.________

directions.He could look forward and backward at the same 7.________

time.He was the god of endings and beginnings.January is first 8.________

month of the year.It's a month on which one looks forward 9.________

to the new year.It's also a period of time people think 10.________

about the past year.

Ⅳ.书面表达

请根据下列内容用英语向来访的外宾介绍你校新建网络学校的情况：

新世纪Net-school网络系统表

多媒体教学系统使教与学更为方便有趣，在课堂上获取更多信息，学到更多知识

电子阅览室

向师生开放

可向世界各地发送电子邮件（e-mail）

可通过因特网（Internet）查寻最新信息

远程教学系统只要家中有电脑，任何人都可以学习本校的课程

注意：

1.介绍必须包括表内的主要内容，可以适当增减信息，使内容连贯。

2.词数100左右

3.生词：①多媒体教学系统：Multimedia Teaching Systemあ诘缱釉睦朗遥篒nformation Centre ③远程教学系统：Long Distance Teaching System

4.文章开头已给出；不计入词数。

Ladies and gentlemen，

Welcome to our New Century Net-school!

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习(限制性与非限制性定语从句)

1.Beijing government puts more than 700 million yuan to increase its green space this year,________doubles the money provided last year.

A.as B.which

C.that D.while

2.Helen is much more kind to her youngest child than to the others,________,of course,makes the others unhappy.

A.who B.which

C.she D.that

3.The wrong you've done him is terrible,for________you should make an apology to him,I think.

A.this B.which

C.what D.that

4.Recently my father bought a Chinese painting,________was very reasonable.

A.the price of whose B.which price

C.the price of which D.its price

5.For weeks the street hasn't been cleaned by the cleaner,________makes it very dirty.

A.who B.which

C.that D.this

6.Don't talk about such things________you are not sure of.

A.that B.what

C.as D.those

7.There are some________believe the bill,________also covers labor and health programs,to be too expensive.

A.who;which B.who;that

C.that;as D.which;which

8.We will be shown around the city:schools,museums,and some other places,________other visitors seldom go.

A.what B.which

C.where D.when

9.Alec asked the policeman________he worked to contact him whenever there was an accident.

A.with him B.who

C.with whom D.whom

10.I shall never forget those years________I lived in the country with the farmers,________has a great effect on my later life.

A.that;which B.when;which

C.which;that D.when;who

11.________is known to all,Taiwan is a part of China.

A.As B.Which

C.That D.What

12.Do you know the girl________?

A.whom he often talk B.he often talks to

C.to who he often talks D.he often talks

13.Alfred Hitchcock________produced a new film called Frenzy.

A.who is well-known for thriller movies

B.whom is well-known for thriller movies

C.,who is well-known for thriller movies

D.,whom is well-known for thriller movies

14.Have you ever been to Xi'an,________I left ten years ago?

A.where B.which

C.that D./

15.The man will never forget the days________he spent with Lenin.

A.when B.which

C.that D.both B and C

16.In the office I never seem to have time until after 5:30 p.m.,________many people have gone home.

A.whose time B.that

C.on which D.by which time

17.The famous basketball star,________tried to make a comeback,attracted a lot of attention. A.where B.when

C.which D.who

18.Greenland,________island in the world,covers over two million kilometres.

A.it is the largest B.that is the largest

C.is the largest D.the largest

19.He was very rude to the customs officer,________of course made things even worse.

A.who B.whom

C.what D.which

20.The general at last got a chance to visit the village________he used to fight,________he had been dreaming of for years.

A.that;which B.where;that

C.in which;what D.where;which

参考答案

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.D 表示很抱歉。A、C两项应用过去的时态。

2.A stop表示停止做一件事时，接动名词作宾语。

3.C apologize to sb.for sth.表示为了某事向某人道歉。本题第一个for表示“替”“代”。 4.D a接序数词，表示“再一”“又一”。

5.A start with指“以……开始”；be to blame指“应该负责”“应该受责备”。

6.B mean表示打算时，接to do不定式。mean,intend,expect等接to have done表示事与愿违。 7.C help oneself to sth.指为自己取食品、饮料等，等于serve oneself with sth.。

8.D 时间、金钱、距离作主语，谓语用单数。over表示“越过”。

9.A 表示“被弄乱”。

10.C

11.B mean to do 表示打算。mean doing表示意味着。

12.D 表示打断（某人）说话。

13.A 从后一句来看“他现在还一直被影响着”，说明老师的话给他留下了持久的，永不磨灭的印象。long是长久的，但也有时间限制。

14.C 表示“忍不住”，cannot help接doing。此题表示“人们有时忍不住被劝买了些他们不需要的东西”，people与persuade是被动关系。

15.B apologize for sth./doing sth.动名词否定，not加在-ing之前。

16.C regret to do 表遗憾/抱歉要做某事。regret doing表后悔做了某事。

17.D 表“后悔”。

18.C instead of连接并列成分，此题连接两个地点状语。

19.D close to表“靠近”。near不接to；next to表“紧挨着”。

20.C drop in on sb.指“顺便拜访”某人，the Smiths指史密斯一家人。drop in at接地点。 21.A 表生活方式。manner表方式时，侧重指行为方式。

22.A be supplied with sth.表提供。B、C选项不与介词with搭配。

23.D close to 中to是介词，接动名词；driver 和kill是被动关系，故不选A。

24.B mean to do表打算，有上下文时，为避免重复，在不定式符号to处省略。

25.D why not接动词原形；try doing表“尝试”，try to do表示“努力”“试图”，强调目的。

Ⅱ.完形填空

1.A 通读全文，从文中coloured woman就应得知她的肤色，故选A。

2.B 70多岁的老妇人，深夜11：30站在路边，从her car我们知道她有车，不应选railway，那么如果是C和D，她应有地方去避雨。

3.C 老妇人任大雨淋，站在路边不走，不难得知，她的车坏了。

4.B 深夜，车又坏了，70多岁的老妇人深夜出门，应有急事，她急需搭车，故badly need最合适。

5.D 老妇人浑身湿透了，她决定拦下一辆车，深夜，公共汽车、出租车在高速路上应很少了，故选car。

6.D unheard是过去分词作定语，相当于定语从句，意思是在20世纪60年代充满矛盾冲突的情形下，帮助人这种事是很少听到的。选of构成heard of。

7.D 把某人带到某地，应用take sb.to故选took。

8.A 年轻人把老妇人带到安全的地方，帮她租了一辆车，因为她自己的车坏了，年轻也不能把自己的车让她用，故选hired。 9.C in a great去掉great,in a正好与hurry连用，构成固定表达。

10.A 从下文中得知，老妇人让人把大彩电送到年轻人家里，就可推断出，老妇人写下的是年轻人的地址。

11.B 送彩电的人就应是卖彩电的人，不可能是老妇人，故选B。

12.A to one's surprise，正合题意，因为年轻人没有想到老妇人会这么做。

13.C 送年轻人彩电，老妇人定有便信以解释，那么这便信应是粘贴在彩电的箱子上的，故选stuck。

14.A 老妇人非常感谢这个年轻人在深夜，在高速路上帮助她，她称自己是上了年纪的老人。故选aged。

15.B the other night是指过去的某个夜晚。

16.B 这里说雨使她全身湿透，故选B较好。

17.B 由于句中有not only，后面定是but，雨不仅湿了她的衣服，而且也让她心灰意冷了。

18.D 就在老妇人心灰意冷时，年轻人来了，有来的及时之意，故用came。

19.A 由于年轻人的帮助，老妇人才能够回到丈夫的床边，故用be able to，选able。

20.B 老妇人正好在她丈夫去世前到了他的床边。故选before。

Ⅲ.短文改错

1.difficulties→difficulty 2.去掉will 3.this→these 4.is→are 5.January后加was 6.at→in 7.√ 8.first前加the 9.on→in 10.time后加when

Ⅳ.书面表达

Ladies and gentlemen,

Welcome to our New Century Net-school!

Our Net-school is made up of three parts.Multimedia Teaching System makes teaching and learning easier and much more interesting.Students can get more information and knowledge in class.Information Center, where we can send e-mails to all parts of the world and get the latest information from Internet, is open to both teachers and students.Long distance Teaching System is for the students who are not studying in our school.They can study at home if they have a computer. Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习

1.B which指代700 million yuan引导非限制性定语从句，起补充说明作用。

2.B which引导定语从句，修饰前面整个句子。

3.B which指代the wrong you've done。

4.C 名词或代词+of+which/whom/whose…引导的定语从句中,of which在定语从句中作定语。which替代a Chinese painting。

5.B which指代前面句子。

6.C as引导定语从句，在从句中作宾语，替代things，主句中有such,the same,as，定语从句中引导词常用。

7.A who在定语从句中作主语，指代some,此处some表示有些人。which替代the bill。 8.C where在定语从句中作状语。

9.C with whom he worked是定语从句，介词with是从句中work with…所要求的。

10.B when在定语从句中作状语，指代in those years;which在从句中作主语，替代前句。 11.A as和which都可引导定语从句，替代句子。但as译为“正如”“正像”，且它引导的从句可在句首也可在句中。

12.B 定语从句修饰先行词the girl,关系词在从句中作talk to的宾语，可用that,whom或省略。

13.C 关系词在定语从句中作主语，所以不用whom。非限制性定语从句对先行词作附加说明。

14.B which在定语从句作left的宾语，非限制性定语从句的关系词作宾语时不能省略。 15.D 关系词在从句中作spend的宾语，可用which或that,也可省略。

16.D which指代5:30p.m.，从句时态为完成时，所以用by短语。

17.D

18.D Greenland与the largest是同位语。非限制性定语从句不能用that引导，故不选B。 19.D which替代前句。

20.D where在定语从句作状语，替代in the village。which指代前句。

篇2：unit6 good manners难点透析：重点词汇、词组(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

1.manners

1)方式[C)通常用作单数“……地”

The sheets are usually folded in this manner．被单常制是这样折叠的。

2)态度，样子(多作复数，有时可加不定冠词)

I don't like his manner．我不喜欢他的态度。

3)习惯，风俗，礼貌(多作复数)

It's bad manners to stare at people．瞪着眼睛看别人是不礼貌的。

custom，habit，manners辨析

1）custom “习惯，风俗”，多用来指“国家，社会”的风俗，习俗，也可以表示某人的“习惯”，常指因长期延续而固定下来的风俗，习惯。如：

Social customs are different in different countries.社会风俗各国不同。

It was Tom's custom to get up early and go for a walk before breakfast．

汤姆的习惯是很早起床，并且在早餐以前散步。

2)habit“习惯”，指个人经常所做之事而不易放弃。

He has a habit of early rising．他有早起的习惯。

3)manners指“习惯，风俗，礼貌”时，常用复数形式，它既可用以指habit，也可用以指custom，它的意义介于habit和custom之间，可与custom连用。如： manners and customs 风俗习惯

2．beside，besides

1)beside prep．(=by the side of; close to；near)在……旁边

Put the cases beside mine when they are ready．把箱子准备好后放在我的箱子旁边。

2)besides adv.“此外、还有”

It’s too late to go out now．Besides，it's starting to rain．现在出去太晚了，况且已开始下雨了。

3．mean to do，mean doing

1) mean to do 打算干某事

I mean to talk with him about it.我打算就此事和他谈谈。

2) mean doing 意味着

I’ll not wait if it means delaying more than two days．如果那意味着将耽误两天多，我就不等了。

3)mean sb．to do sth．打算让某人干某事

I don't mean you to read this letter．我不打算让你读这封信。

4)means 手段、方法(单复数同形)

by this means=in this way=with this method通过这种方法

I’1l do the job by this means．我将用这种方法做这项工作。

by means of 用……方法

Thoughts are expressed by means of words．思想用语言来表达。

by no means 决不、一点也不

She is by no means poor，in fact，she's quite rich．她一点也不穷，实际上她很有钱。

by all means(=Of course，certainly) 当然可以

“Can I see it?”“By all means．”--我可以看看吗? --当然可以。

4．drink to，drink a toast

drink to …“为……干杯、为……祝酒”其中to是介词．

Let's drink to the success of your schoo1．让我们为你学校的成功干杯。

Let's drink to the happiness of the bride and bridegroom．让我们为新郎和新娘的幸福干杯。

drink a toast 祝酒、敬酒(=toast v．)

Having good table manners means knowing，for example，how to use knives and forks，when to drink a toast (to toast)and how to behave yourself at the table．

在餐桌上，“懂礼节”意味着你知道如何使用刀叉、何时祝酒以及如何在进餐时举止得当。

Let's drink a toast to your health!让我们举杯祝你健康!

5．start，start with

start(=begin)一般情况下start doing sth．=start to do sth．

如:He started learning／to learn English when he was only three．他三岁就开始学习英语。

但下列三种情况只能用start to do sth．

a)当主语是物而不是人时。如：

The ice started to melt．冰开始融化了。．

b)当start用于进行时态时。如：

She is starting to cook the dinner．她正开始做饭。

c)当start后面的非谓语动词指心理状态或精神活动(如:think，realize, wonder, understand...)时。如：

She started to wonder who had done it. 她开始(感到)纳闷，这件事究竟是谁做的。

start with 从(以)……开始

A western dinner usually starts with a small dish called a starter．西餐通常以一道叫做开胃小菜开始。

注意：to start with 还可作插入语，意为“首先、第一点”。如：

We can't go．To start with，it is too cold．Besides，we don’t have enough money．我们不能去了。首先，天太冷；此外，我们没有足够的钱。

6．introduce v．介绍、引进(introduction, n．)

introduce sb．to sb．把某人介绍给某人

The teacher has just introduced the new pupil to the rest of the class．老师刚向班上其他同学介绍了那位新同学。

introduce oneself 自我介绍

Let me introduce myself to you all．让我向你们大家作自我介绍。

注意：其后不跟双宾语，即没有“introduce sb．sth．”这种表达法类似的词还有explain， suggest等。

introduce a new idea(technique．．．)引入一种新思想(技术……)

I hope that they will soon introduce new techniques to reduce the pollution．我希望他们早些引进降低污染的新技术。

7．impression 压痕、印象脚印常用 “footprint” 或 “footmark’’表示。

What were your first impressions of London?你对伦敦的最初印象如何?

常见的词组：

make a good impression 留下好印象

First impressions are half the battle．[谚]最初的印象最深刻；先入为主。

Give sb．a favorable impression 给某人以好印象

Give one's impression of 陈述自己对……的印象

Make an impression on sb. 给某人留下印象；给人以……影响

Make no impression on 对……无影响(效果)

8.unfold

unfold是由表否定前缀un+fold构成的。表否定的前缀还有：

dis---disappear，discourage，disappoint

in-(il-，im-，ir-)--independent，informal，illegal，impolite， irregular

un---unknown，unlock，unhappy，untie，unfair

mis---mistake，misunderstand，misspell non---nonsmoker，nonstop

9．follow v．

1)跟随

He followed the old man into the building．他跟随那老人进了大楼。

Spring follows winter．冬去春来。

注意：following与followed不同 ’

He came in，following the teacher．他跟着老师进来。

He came in，followed by the teacher．他走了进来，后面跟着老师。

2)遵循、遵照、听从、仿效

follow one’s advice听从某人的建议

Follow the instruction on the bottle．照瓶子上的说明做。

3)听懂、听清

I don't quite follow you．Will you speak slowly?

我听不太清，请慢点说好吗?(don't不能用can't；can't表示无能力听清。)

4)follow the example of…(=learn from)向……学习

We must follow the example of Lei Feng．我们必须向雷锋学习。

5)as follows 如下 He explained it as follows．他做了如下解释。

篇3：学习手册Unit1 Good friends(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

quality；smart；honest；brave；loyal；handsome；argue；be fond of；survive；deserted；hunt for；make fire；treat as；care about；make friends with；on board；tell lies；regard as；be quick in mind and action；wait for sb. to do sth.；scared；drop sb. a line

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

I think…

I like/I love/I hate…

I enjoy…

My interests are…

Ⅲ.语法

直接引语与间接引语（1）

●学习障碍

Ⅰ.单词及短语

especially；nor；like；boring；interest；everyday；deserted；hunt；make fire；treat as；share；care；on board the plane

Ⅱ.语法

直接引语和间接引语(1)

1.直接引语和间接引语的句式转换。

2.直接引语和间接引语的时态变化。

●学习策略

I.单词及短语部分

especially adv.特殊的,尤其是

横向比较法：

especially与specially区别

especially

（1）侧重于多种事物或人中比较突出的。

I like all the subjects at school,especially English.

（2）especially 后可接介词短语或从句。 I like the country,especially in spring.

Noise is unpleasant,especially when you are trying to sleep.

specially 侧重特意地，专门地做某事。

I made a chocolate cake specially for you.

联系语境法：

I like it very much，________ the last part.

A.especial B.specially

C.special D.especially

答案：D

2.nor conj.也不

纵向归纳法：

(1)nor在引导分句时，分句要用倒装句，即：nor+助动词/be动词/情态动词+主语+其他I don't know，nor do I care.

(2)用于neither…nor…并列连词中

I have neither time nor money for the concert.

注意：本词组连接主语时，句子的谓语动词要用“就近原则”，即谓语动词与离它近的主语一致。

Neither the students nor the teacher understands the problem.

(3)nor指前者没有做某事，后者也没有做。可由neither替换。

I can't finish the job on time.Nor(Neither)can Jim.

综合运用法：

If you don't want to go to the concert,________.

A.me,too B.nor do I

C.so shall I D.nor will I

答案：D 本题为倒装句与条件状语从句时态呼应知识的综合运用。

3.like（vt.）+动名词

纵向归纳法：

like doing sth. 经常喜欢做某事

I like walking.

like to do sth. 偶然，某次喜欢做某事

I don't like to walk，for it's raining.

横向比较法：

与like类似用法的还有其他表示喜好、厌恶的词：love， prefer，dislike，hate等。

综合运用法：

用动词的适当形式填空。

I like people ________(tell) the truth.

答案： to tell like sb. to do.sth.=should/would like sb.to do sth.想要某人做某事

4.boring adj. 令人厌烦的

纵向归纳法：

bore（vt.） boring，bored

bore (vt.) 令人厌烦

This book bores me.

boring adj.令人厌烦的

The book is very boring.

bored adj.感到厌烦的

I'm bored with the book.

横向比较法：

有此表示情感的及物动词，有与bore类似的用法。如：

interest,excite,surprise,amaze,frighten,astonish,move,inspire(令人激励),touch,scare,

disappoint,puzzle,worry这类词的现在分词形式，为“令人……”；过去分词形式，为“感到……”。

The student was excited at the exciting news.

5.interest n.兴趣；爱好

纵向归纳法：

interest可构成如下短语

have an interest in sth./in doing sth.对某方面有兴趣

show interest in sth./in doing sth.对某方面显示兴趣

take(an) interest in sth./in doing sth对某方面有兴趣

develop interest in sth./in doing sth.对某方面培养出兴趣

find interest in sth./in doing sth.对某方面培养出兴趣

feel interest in sth./in doing sth.对某方面感兴趣

lose interest in sth./in doing sth.对某方面失去兴趣

His father took no interest in him.

They find interest in studying English in that way.

有时interest 可与不定冠词连用。

He developed an interest in science。

另外：interest还可作“爱好”讲。

His interests include reading and tennis.

联系语境法：

用interest的适当形式填空

(1)His ________ in life are music and painting.

(2)I've lost my ________ in natural history.

答案：(1)interests (2)interest

6.everyday adj.日常的

横向比较法：

everyday adj.连写，“日常的”作定语；every day分写，“每天”，作状语。

We speak English .

答案： everyday every day

7.deserted adj.被抛弃的

纵向归纳法：

desert [dezt]n.沙漠 the Sahara Desert撒哈拉沙漠

desert[di′z:t]vt.丢弃，遗弃

He deserted his wife and children after becoming rich.

deserted adj.荒废的，空的

The city was deserted during the war.

综合运用法：

Gebi ________ was once a prosperous place which ________ because the environment there was destroyed.

A.desert；deserted B.Desert；was deserted

C.Desert；deserted D.desert；was deserted

答案： B

8.hunt v.打猎；搜寻

横向比较法：

hunt for= hunt after搜寻；逐猎

hunt down 终于找到，追捕

hunt out搜寻出

hunt through找遍；翻找

联系语境法：

用适当的介词或副词填空

(1)I have hunted ________ the house but I cannot find my pen.

(2)I've found the book I was hunting ________.

(3)I'll have to hunt ________ the children's old clothes to give to the beggar.

(4)The police hunted ________ the escaped prisoner at last.

答案：(1)through (2) for (3) out (4) down

9.make fire点火

横向比较法：

有以下fire（n.）短语

be on fire着火了（表示状态）

catch fire燃着；着火（表示动作）

play with fire干冒险的事

set sth. on fire=set fire to sth.放火烧……

make (a) fire点火；生火

start/cause a fire引起火灾

put out the fire扑灭火灾

The fire is out.火灭了。

联系语境法：

用动词的适当形式填空

(1)They are ________ a fire to cook the meal.

(2)The house ________ fire yesterday evening.And it has ________ on fire for two hours.

(3)If I ________ fire to this book,it would burn.

(4)The fire was ________ by careless smoking.

答案：（1）making (2) caught,been (3) set (4) caused

10.treat…as…把……看做……

The kind lady treated me as her own daughter.

横向比较法：

表示 “认为” 的短语还有:

regard…as…,

consider…（as）…,

think of…as…,

look on/upon…as…,

take…for…

注意：在consider…as…短语中，as可省略，其他短语中不可。

综合运用法：

I don't ________ him my best friend.

A.treat B.regard

C.consider D.think of

答案：C

11.share

纵向归纳法：

(1)share均分

Let's share the loaf of bread among us.

(2)share…with…与……分享……

The two friends share joys and sorrows with each other.

(3)share in分担……

I'll share with you in the cost.

联系语境法：

在必要的地方填上适当的介词

(1)He shared ________ the planning of the picnic.

(2)She and Mary shared ________ the same tastes and interests.

(3)Please share your newspaper ________me.

答案：（1）in (2)/(3) with

12.care v.

纵向比较法：

care for 喜欢；照顾，照料

care about在意；关心

联系语境法：

用正确的介词填空

(1)I don't care ________ Paris.

(2)She thinks only of herself；she doesn't care ________ other people.

(3)The house looked well cared________.

(4)The professor said that he was interested only in research；he didn't care ________ his students.

答案：（1）for (2) about (3) for (4) about

Ⅱ.语法部分

纵向归纳法：

1.直接引语变间接引语时有着时态、人称、时间状语、地点状语的变化。其变化形式见下列表格：

（1）时态的变化

直接引语间接引语

一般现在时

He said,“I'm afraid I can't finish this work. 一般过去时

He said that he was afraid he couldn't finish that work.

现在进行时

He said,“I'm using the knife.” 过去进行时

He said that he was using the knife.

一般将来时

Zhou Lan said,“I'll do it after class.” 过去将来时

Zhou Lan said that she would do it after class.

一般过去时

He said,“I came to help you.” 过去完成时

He said that he had come to help me.

现在完成时

She said,“I have not heard from him since May. 过去完成时

She said that she had not heard from him since May.

过去完成时

He said,“I had finished my homework before supper.” 过去完成时

He said that he had finished his homework before supper.

（2）人称变化

He said,“I like it very much.”→He said that he liked it very much.

He said to me,“I've left my book in your room.” → He told me that he had left his book in my room.

（3）指示代词的变化this→ that；these→ those

She said ,“I'll come this morning.”→She said that she would go that morning.

He said,“These books are mine.”→ He said that those books were his.

（4）时间状语的变化now→then；today→that day,yesterday→the day before；tomorrow→the next day/the following day

He said,“It is nine o'clock now.”

→ He said that it was nine o'clock then.

She said,“I haven't seen her today.”

→ He said that he hadn't seen her that day.

She said,“I went there yesterday.”

→ She said that she had gone there the day before.

She said，“I'll go there tomorrow.”

→ She said that she would go there the next (following) day.

（5）地点状语的变化here→ there

He said,“My sister was here three days ago.”

→He said that his sister had been there three days before.

（6）动词的变化come →go

She said,“I will come here this evening.”

→She said that she would go there that evening.

2.直接引语变间接引语不同句式的变化方法：

直接引语句式间接引语连词

陈述句

He said，“You are a good girl.” 用that 连接（that）可以省略：He said (that) she was a good girl.

一般疑问句

He said,“Are you interested in English? 用if或whether连接，said改为asked，其后还可以加sb.，句子用陈述句语序。

He asked me if I was interested in English.

特殊疑问句

“What do you want?”he asked me. 用原来的特殊疑问词引导，句子用陈述句语序。

He asked me what I wanted.

●方法实践

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.-What does your new house look like?

-________.

A.It looks well B.It is bright and large

C.It looks like a cave D.I don't like it

2.-I can't see the picture well from here.

-________ .

A.Nor can't I B.Neither I can

C.I can't,neither D.Nor can I

3.Little ________ what others think.

A.does he care about B.care he about

C.about he cared D.about cared he.

4.She likes ________,but she doesn't like ________ this afternoon.She'd like ________some other day.

A.swimming；swimming；to swim

B.to swim；swimming；to swim

C.swim；to swim；swimming

D.swimming；to swim；to swim

5.At school,what he enjoys ________ football.

A.playing B.to play

C.is playing D.played

6.At the ________ news,all the women present burst out crying.

A.unexpecting B.disappointing

C.disappointed D.interesting

7.The speech was very ________,and we were ________ to tears.

A.moved；moved B.moving；moving

C.moving；moved D.moved；moving

8.The wolf said in a ________voice and the scholar felt________.

A.frighting；frightened B.frightened；frightened

C.frightened;frightening D.frightening；frightening

9.In our ________ life,English is ________ used.

A.everyday；wide B.everyday；widely

C.every day；wide D.every day；widely

10.-Hello,Mary.I've got a girlfriend.

-What's she like?

-________.

A.I don't know

B.She's like her mother,not father

C.She likes music

D.Not bad! Quite pretty

11.It is always difficult being in a foreign country,________ if you don't speak the language.

A.extremely B.naturally

C.basically D.especially

12.________ I met him,he was working in that company.

A.The first time which B.As the first time

C.The first time D.Since the first time

13.The fire ________ for half an hour before the fire fighters arrived.

A.had put on B.was put on

C.had been out D.had broken out

14.Before I could catch the letter she dropped,it was already ________ fire.

A.on the B.on a

C.on D.in

15.It has been suggested that the land ________ equally among the peasants.

A.be shared B.should be spared

C.saved D.be spent

16.She took ________ in physics and read ________ on the subject.

A.interest；as books many as she could

B.an interest；as many books as she could

C.interested；as many books as she can

D.interests；as books as she could

17.-How's the young man?

-________.

A.He's twenty B.He's a doctor

C.He is much better D.He's David

18.Let Harry play with your toys as well,Clare-you must learn to ________.

A.support B.care

C.spare D.share

19.-Do you remember the lecture given by that famous professor?

-Yes,________ forget it.

A.Never I shall B.Never shall I

C.Neither shall I D.Nor do I

20.-What about your classmate,Susan?

-Our teacher ________ her a good and clever student.

A.regards B.believes

C.suggests D.considers

21.The ________ look on his face suggested that he ________ that.

A.surprising；hadn't expected

B.surprising；would expect

C.surprised；hadn't expected

D.surprised；shouldn't expected

22.-Do you know Mr Li is going aboard?

-I don't know,________.

A.either B.nor do I care

C.and I don't care it D.too

23.Those T-shirts are usually $35 each,but today they have a ________price of $19 in the shopping center.

A.special B.regular

C.cheap D.particular

24.Everybody in our village,men and women,young and old,________ sports and games.

A.are fond of B.joins

C.enjoys D.go in for

25.-My brother never washes his own dirty clothes.

-Oh，really？ ________.

A.I don't care B.don't be sorry

C.It doesn't matter D .It's OK with me

Ⅱ.阅读理解

Jonathan Rivers lived alone in a neat house in Compton Street and worked in London.Like many other single men in their middle age,he was getting rather set in his ways.He looked after the house well and had a beautiful garden.Before he left the house in the morning,he would carefully close all the doors downstairs,open some windows upstairs to let the air in and lock the front door.One summer evening Jonathan returned home as usual,just at five minutes to seven.When he opened the front gate he immediately noticed something strange.There was a heavy footprint(脚印）in the earth in one of the flower beds.Jonathan was just going to blame the milkman when he noticed that one of the white curtains in the front room downstairs was out of place.Jonathan never left anything out of place.

He walked up to the front door and opened it quietly.He listened carefully for a few moments but could hear nothing.The front-room door was half-open.Jonathan studied it thoughtfully,wondering if he had forgotten to close it that morning.He had never forgotten to do it before.He stepped silently across the hall to the door and looked inside the room.The shadow of a man was clearly reflected on the far wall in the evening sunlight.The man had clearly been standing behind the door since Jonathan's return.Jonathan immediately locked the door.Then he calmly picked up the telephone in the hall and set about calling the police.

The burglar(盗贼）,a tall fellow with a beard,tried to climb through a windows to get out but Jonathan had expected that.He attacked him with his umbrella,using it like a sword.Three minutes later the police arrived on the scene.Jonathan was a little annoyed that he had to have dinner later than usual but on the whole he felt quite pleased with himself.

1.From the sentence“Like many other single men in their middle age,he was getting rather set in his ways”we learn that ________.

A.middle-aged men are likely to have different ways of living

B.many other single men in the world would rather live like Jonathan

C.Jonathan liked to do things in the same way as other middleaged single men did

D.Jonathan was getting into the habit of doing things in the same way every day.

2.What was the first thing Jonathan noticed when he came back home one summer evening?

A.A curtaining in the front room was not in its place.

B.The windows of the front room were open.

C.There was a sign of the postman's entering his room.

D.A heavy footprint was in one of the flower beds.

3.Did the burglar know Jonathan's coming home?How do you know?

A.Yes,because he hid himself behind the half-opened door.

B.Yes,because he was ready to hit Jonathan on the back.

C.No,because he was still stealing in the room.

D.No,because he kept the door half-open.

4.What did Jonathan do when the burglar attempted to escape from the window?

A.He called the police by shouting at the top his voice.

B.He immediately locked the door and rushed to the police station.

C.He hit the burglar with the point of his umbrella.

D.He had expected that the burglar would hit him.

5.We learn from the passage that Jonathan ________.

A.was strong enough to fight the burglar

B.was quite inexperienced in dealing with burglars

C.had a close friend who was a policeman

D.hated his routine to be disturbed by anything unexpected

Ⅲ.短文改错

My Favourite Sport

My favourite sport is football.I was a member of 1.________

our school football team.We practise for three times 2.________

every week and often watch football match on TV 3.________

together.Play football not only makes us grow up 4.________

tall and strong but also give us a sense of fair play and 5.________

team spirit.We must keep in mind that we play 6.________

for the team instead ourselves.Also,the sport 7.________

teaches us the important of obedience(服从).Each 8.________

player must obey captain,who is the leader of 9.________

the team.And they must not break the rules too 10.________

often if we want to win the game.

Ⅳ.书面表达

假设你是李华，你的澳大利亚朋友Dick听说中国的中小学正在减轻学生的学习负担，来信询问有关情况。请你根据下表提供的信息，写一封回信，谈一谈减负给你的学习和生活带来的变化。

周末活动（减负前）周末活动（减负后）

白天：上课、做作业白天：参观博物馆、学习电脑、绘画等

晚上：做作业晚上：看新闻、读书、看报

注意：1. 词数100左右；

2. 开头已为你写好。ど词：减轻学习负担： reduce learning load

Dear Dick,

How nice to hear from you again.

Best wishes.

Yours,

Li Hua

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习（直接引语与间接引语转换练习）

（Ⅰ）将下列句子由直接引语变为间接引语。每空一词。

1.The teacher said,“I've taken some good pictures in the mountain.”

The teacher said that ________ ________ taken some good pictures in the mountain.

2.The teacher said,“Water can change into steam.”

The teacher said that water ________ change into steam.

3.Tom asked Mary,“Are you tired?”

Tom asked Mary ________ ________ ________tired.

4.He asked,“What can I do?”

He asked me ________ ________ ________do.

5.“Will you please pass me that book?” he asked.

He asked me ________ ________ ________pass ________that book.

6.The driver said,“I will pick up a passenger at West Street.”

The driver said that ________ ________ pick up a passenger at West Street.

7.He said,“I was born in 1982.”

He said ________ ________ born in 1982.

8.The man asked,“What's the matter with the boy?”

The man asked what ________ ________ ________with the boy.

9.The stranger asked me,“Where do you think I can find the disc?”

The stranger asked me where ________ ________ he ________ find the disc.

10.He said,“Did you see him last night?”

He asked ________ ________ ________ him ________ ________ ________.

（Ⅱ）单项选择

1.Can you tell me ________ the railway station?

A.how I can get to B.how can I get to

C.where I can get to D.where can I get to

2.They asked ________ to help us.

A.what could they do B.what they could do

C.how they could D.how could they

3.The mother asked ________ the gold ring.

A.where Alice had put B.where had Alice put

C.where Alice has put D.where has Alice put

4.The boy asked me ________in a million years.

A.what man would look like B.what would man look like

C.what look would man like D.man would look like what

5.There are many kinds of tape-recorders on sale that I can't make up my mind ________ to buy.

A.what B.which

C.how D.where

6.I remember ________ this used to be a quiet village.

A.when B.how

C.where D.what

7.-Do you remember ________ he came?

-Yes,I do,he came by car.

A.how B.when

C.that D.if

8.He asked ________ for the violin.

A.did I pay how much B.I paid how much

C.how much did I pay D.how much I paid

9.You can't imagine ________ when they received these nice Christmas gifts.

A.how they were excited B.how excited they were

C.how excited were they D.they were how excited

10.It was a matter of ________ would take the position.

A.who B.whoever

C.whom D.whomever

参考答案

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.B 回答主语的特征。

2.D 用倒装句“也不”。

3.A little为否定副词,在句首用部分倒装。

4.D like doing…经常喜欢做……。

5.C what he enjoys为主语从句。主句谓语动词为be。表语为playing football。不要误以为playing是enjoy的宾语而误选 A。

6.B 联系语境,所有在场的妇女都哭了,因此为disappointing。令人失望的消息。

7.C moving令人感动的;moved受到感动的。

8.A frightening，令人害怕;frightened，感到害怕。

9.B everyday widely adv.。

10.D 表外表。

11.D especially可加从句。

12.C 连词词组。

13.C be out火熄灭。

14.C on fire着火。

15.A suggest后用虚拟语气。be shared前用should省略。

16.B

17.C how is sb.某人身体如何。

18.D share分享;support支持;care在意;spare抽出;空余的。

19.B never用在句首用部分倒装。

20.D consider…as…认为……是……，as可省略。

21.C surprised感到吃惊的表情,因此用surprised他没料到已经发生,用 hadn't表示过去完成时。

22.B

23.A a special price特价

24.C everybody为单数,作句子主语.men and women……为它的同位语; 因此v.用单数,A、B均不能选;B.join后加上in。

25.A 我不在乎。

Ⅱ.阅读理解

1.D 形成了习惯每天做什么。

2.D 花圃中有脚印。

3.A 小偷藏在半开的门的后面。

4.C 倒数第一段信息。

5.D 他不愿让他的生活被一些意外的事情干扰。

Ⅲ.短文改错

1.was→am 2.去掉for 3.match→matches 4.Play→Playing 5.give→gives 6.√ 7.ourselves前加of 8.important→importance9.captain前加the 10.they→we

Ⅳ.书面表达

Dear Dick,

How nice to hear from you again. You want to know what is going on in schools in China? In short, things have begun to improve since schools were called on to reduce learning load. I don't know about others, but I used to have to work even at weekends doing endless homework and attending classes as well. Now I have more free time. I can follow my own interests such as reading book, visiting museums, and taking computer lessons. In the evenings I can watch news on TV or read newspapers. What's more, I can go to bed earlier. As far as I know, everyone is happy about this new arrangement of things.Best wishes.

Yours

Li Hua

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习

（Ⅰ）1.he had 2.can 3.if she was 4.what he could 5.if I would;him 6.he would 7.he was 8.was the matter 9.I thought;could 10.if I saw;the night before

（Ⅱ）1.A 2.B 3.A 4.A 5.B 6.A 7.A 8.D 9.A 10.A

篇4：unit 6 good manners whole unit(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

The First Period (Warming Up & Listening)

Teaching Aims:

1. Learn to apologize to people.

2. Train the Ss’ speaking ability.

Teaching Important Point:

Master the ways of apologies by listening and speaking.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to help the Ss use the expression for making apologies freely.

Teaching Methods:

1. Pair work to act out the dialogues in Warming Up part.

2. Listening-and-answer activity to train the Ss’ listening ability.

Teaching Aids:

1.a computer

2.a projector

3.a tape recorder

Teaching Procedures:

StepⅠ.Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

StepⅡ.Lead-in

T: As we know, China is a country of a long history, besides China is a polite country. In our daily life, we should say polite words, such as “谢谢”, “请”, “对不起” and so on. It is very important to be polite in our daily life in China. Right?

S: Yes.

T: And how about in western countries? Ok, let me give you some examples. Imagine that we are now all in London, Xueyan and me are walking on the street, suddenly she run into me, and of course I’m going to be angry, then what should you say to comfort me, Xueyan?

S: I’m sorry.

T: Yes, then to be polite what should I say?

S: That’s OK.

T: Right. As we are foreigners in London, unfortunately, I lost my way, I can’s find my way to the hotel, so I have to ask some Londoners to help me, then what should I say first?

S: Excuse me.

T: Right. After he or she telling me the way, what should I say?

S: Thank you.

T: Yes. Now we’ve got the answer, it is also very important to be polite in western countries. And I think you’ve learned much about how to be polite. Today we are going to start a new unit, unit 6----Good Manners. Can you tell me what “good manners” mean?

S: Being polite.

T: Quite right.

Step Ⅲ. Warming up

T: OK. Now please open your books to page 36 Warming up. There are four pictures on the right, right/

S: Yes.

T: Do you know what happened in the pictures? Zhengmohan.

S: In picture 1, a student comes to the classroom.

T: And maybe he is talking to his teacher, right/

S: Yes.

T: And how about the second picture? Jiangquan.

S: A student are talking with two teachers.

T: Quite right, thank you. And the third picture? Yepingping.

S: The girl’s umbrella may have hurt the boy.

T: Thank you. Sit down, please. And the last one? Zhangzhenzhen.

S: Maybe they are quarreling.

T: Quarreling? Maybe, we can see from the picture that someone is angry. Anyway, that’s just our imagination, I don’t know exactly what happened in the pictures, and you don’t know either, right?

S: Yes.

T: But that’s OK, now you can complete the dialogues by making use of the expressions in the second column, then maybe you can tell me what really happened in the pictures. And before you do this exercise, I’d like to divide you into four groups to have a competition, the group that answer more questions will win it, clear?

S: Yes.

T: OK, can you start to do the exercise now?

S: Yes.

(After a few minutes, ask Ss to work in pairs to act out the four dialogues.)

T: Have you finished?

S: Yes.

T: OK, any volunteers? OK, in group 1, Liusuxing you two please.

S: Excuse me. Can I come in?

Sure. We’ve already started.

I’m sorry. I missed the bus.

That’s OK. We are one page47.

T: Do they get the correct answers?

S: Yes.

T: OK, let’s check the answers. (Show the correct answers on the screen, and add one point for group 1.)

T: The next one? OK, in group 4, Dingzhongjie you two please.

S: Excuse me. May I interrupt you for a moment?

What is it, Jordan?

I’m sorry, Mr. Baker. I put my homework on your desk.

T: Great, thank you. (Show the correct answers on the screen, and add one point for group 4.) And the next one? Lingjiali you two please.

S: Hey, be careful.

Oh, I’m so sorry.

That’s all right.

T: Thank you. (Show the correct answers on the screen, and add one point for group 1.). Next, Jingmaosheng you two.

S: Ouch! What are you doing?

I’m terribly sorry.

T: Thanks. (Show the correct answers on the screen, and add one point for group 1). You’ve all done a good job, now we are clear about what happened in the four pictures, right?

S: Yes.

T: And what do you think are common in the four pictures?

S: They all say sorry to somebody.

T: Yes, they do something wrong, then they apologize to someone. “apologize” is a verb, we usually say “apologize to sb for sth”, and “apology” is its noun form.

StepⅣ. Listening

These four dialogues are short ones, to learn how to make apology better, let’s learn a longer one, now let’s come to the Listening part. There are some questions on the book, first have a look at the questions, then we will start to listen. OK, are you ready?

S: Yes.

T: OK, here we go. (play the tape for the first time)

Have you got all the answers?

S: No.

T: It doesn’t matter, now I’ll stop the tape when we come to the important part. (play the tape for the second time)

Got the answers?

S: Yes.

T: OK, who’d like to answer the first question? Zhangzhong.

S: Taking my bike without asking

Losing the bike

T: Sit down please. Correct or wrong?

S: Correct.

(show the correct answer on the screen and add one point for group 2)

T: The next question, Wuxingmiao.

S: I’m sorry.

T: Right. (show the correct answer on the screen and add one point for group 1) Sunbirui, the next question.

S: That’s OK.

T: Thank you. (show the correct answer on the screen and add one point for group 2) Next, Wangzhongxi.

S: Have to apologize.

T: Right. (show the correct answer on the screen and add one point for group 1) The next one, Lingjingzhu.

S: That’s all right.

T: Sit down please. (show the correct answer on the screen and add one point for group 3) Lingyuejing, the next one.

S: That’s OK, forget it.

T: Quite right. (show the correct answer on the screen and add one point for group 3) And the last question, Dingchang.

S: I am really sorry about the bike.

T: Very good. (show the correct answer on the screen and add one point for group 4) Well done. Most of you have got the correct answer, do you want to listen to the tape again, and have a look at the original dialogue?

S: Yes.

T: OK. (Play the tape for the third time and show the original dialogue on the screen.) Quite easy, right?

S: Yes.

T: It is known to all, it is good manners to be polite. And how about these behaviors. (Show some pictures of good and bad behaviors on the screen and ask Ss to tell it is good or bad behaviors in the picture.) Any volunteers? OK, Xiayixi.

S: It is bad manners to kick the dustbin.

……

S: It is good manners to help the older.

S: It is good manners to give the seat to the person who is carrying a baby.

S: It is bad manners to spit.

S: It is bad manners to smoke in public place.

T: Today we’ve learned much how to make apology, I hope it could help us to become polite. Today’s homework is to preview the reading. Class over. See you.

The Second Period (reading)

Teaching Aims:

1. Learn some useful words and expressions.

2. Train the students’ reading ability.

3. Get the students to learn about table manners in western countries.

Teaching Important Points:

1. Learn and master the following useful expressions: make a good impression, be close to, a little bit, start with, keep silent, ask for, at table, all the time, drink to, too much.

Teaching Difficult Point:

How to help the students understand the passage exactly, especially the following sentences:

1. The knife and fork that are close to your plate are a little bit bigger than the ones beside them.

2. in China, you sometimes get a hot, damp cloth to clean your face and hands, which, however, is not the custom in western countries.

Teaching Methods:

1. Discussion to compare table manners in China with that in western countries.

2. Fast reading and careful reading to understand the passage exactly.

3. Group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.a projector

Teaching Procedures:

StepⅠ.Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

StepⅡ.Lead-in

T: Have you ever been to a Chinese dinner party?

S: Yes.

T: Me too. Now I’d like to share one of my attending Chinese dinner party experiences with you. Once I was invited to a Chinese dinner party, after entering the hall, I immediately took a seat, but my mother asked me to stand up, she said that I can’t take that seat. I was puzzled, why I can’t take that seat, every seat is for people to take, do you know why?

S: You are a child.

S: There are too many persons.

T: OK, let me tell you the correct answer, because the seat I took was the most important seat, it is for the people who are aged or who are most important. We call this as “table manners”. And do you know some other Chinese table manners?

S: We eat with chopsticks.

T: Yes, it’s impolite to eat with hands. Any more?

S: We stand up when others make a toast.

T: Right. And can we laugh at the table?

S: No.

T: We can’t laugh, we should smile at the table. And how do you usually get the food, can you stand up to get the food?

S: No.

T: Yes, we can’t stand up to get the food, we should wait for others to get the food for us. You’ve known much about Chinese table manners, and how about western table manners, what do you know about it?

S: They eat with knives and forks.

T: Very good. Any more?

S: ----

T: That’s OK, for today we are going to learn a passage about western table manners at a dinner party. Now open your books to page 38 , read the passage quickly and divide the passage into 3 parts, and find out the main idea of each part.

S: The first part is paragraph 1, its main idea is about laying the table and good table manners. The second part is from paragraph2 to paragraph5, it’s mainly about the order of dishes and good table manners. The third part is the last paragraph, it’s mainly about table manners’ changing over the places and times.

T: Very good. Now imagine I’m the general manager of Wenzhou Dynasty Hotel, my company is going to employ a waiter, as a qualified waiter, he or she must know exactly what are the dish order, how to lay the table and so on. Now I’d like to ask one person of each group to come to the blackboard to join the interviewing.

T: The first question, what is the correct dish order?

(Ss wirte the answers on the paper, then I check the answer)

T: How to lay the table?

(Ss put the paper tableware on the paper, then I check the correct answer)

T: Read para1,2 carefully, and decide which of the following behaviors are polite or impolite at a western dinner party .

(P) Use the knife with your right hand.

(P) Put your napkin on your lap.

(I) Start eating as soon as your food is served in front of you

(I) Ask for a second bowl of soup.

(I) Use one’s fingers to clean teeth.

(P) Ladies first.

(Ask Ss to tell their answers, and explain it to the Ss)

StepⅠ.Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.StepⅡ.Revision

T: In the last period, we learned a passage about western table manners, now I’d like to retell the story together with you, each person say one sentence. Start from me. Knowing some table manners will help us make a good impression.

S: There are two spoons, two knives, two forks, three glasses, one napkin, and two plates on the table.

S: We should use the knife with our right hand, and use the fork with our left hand.

S: Dinner starts with a small dish called starter.

S: When someone is praying we should keep silent.

S: After the starter we will get a soup, but it’s impolite to ask for a second serving.

S: The next dish is the main course.

S: Many westerners think the chicken breast with its tender white flesh is the best part of the bird.

S: We should eat all the food on the plate.

S: During the dinner, we should smile and speak quietly.

S: Westerners usually take only a sip.

StepⅢ Word study

T: Very good, I’m sure you’ve learned the table manners by heart. Now, let’s learn a passage about Chinese table manners. Open your books to page 40, do exercise2.

T: Finished?

S: Yes.

T: OK, let’s check the answers. What should we fill in the first blank?

S: Damp.

T: Right. It means wet. The next one?

S: Custom.

T: Yes. The next one?

S: Dishes.

T: Go on.

S: Noodles

T: Mix means to put different things together

S: Middle.

S: Breast

S: Tender

S: Chopsticks

S: Bones

S: Spoon

S: Spirits

S; Toast

T: It means cheers

Step ⅣSpeaking

T: Well done. In a party, a lot of things may happen, you may take someone else’s glass, or hit someone by chance, then to be polite you should apologize to him. Do you still remember the expressions for making apology?

S: I’ sorry,------

The Forth Period (writing & language study)

Teaching Aims:

1. Learn some negative prefixes to master the word formation rules of changing the meaning of a word to its opposite.

2. Learn to write a thank you letter.

3. Learn more about good manners over the world.

Teaching important points:

1. Master the word formation rules to improve students’ ability to enlarge their vocabulary.

2. Master how to write a thank you letter.

Teaching methods:

1.Practising to learn the word formation rules.

Teaching Procedures:

StepⅠ.Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

StepⅡ.Writing

Writing a thank-you also conveys someone’s politeness or good manners, so when we receive other’s help or gifts, we should write him a thank-you letter.

T: Now please read the passage carefully and find out the main idea of each paragraph.

Paragraph 1 Thank the people of what they did for you. Give some details about what you liked.

Paragraph 2 Tell the people something about yourself and the things you are doing now.

Paragraph 3 Ask the people for some details about themselves and what they are doing now. Close the letter by repeating your thanks.

Step Ⅲ Language study

T: It is polite to write a thank you letter to others, but it is impolite to speak loudly in class, right?

S: Yes.

T: Do you find any similarity between “polite” and “impolite”?

S: They both have the word “polite”

T: Yes, “impolite” is made up of “polite” and “im”, and the word “impolite” means what?

S: It means “not polite”.

T: So “im” means what?

S: Not.

T: Quite right. We have the word “formal”, and we also have the word “informal”, what does “informal” mean?

S: It means not formal.

T: “informal” is the compound of “formal” and “in”, so we may guess the meaning of “in”, it also means?

S: Not.

T: Dingchang, do you smoke?

S: No.

T: So, we may say Dingchang is not a smoker. Can we use another word to replace “not”?

S: We can use the word “nonsmoker”.

T: Right. And what does “non” mean?

S: It also means not.

T: We’ve learned the word “usual” and “unusual”, and we know they are opposite words, so we can make sure that “un” means not, right?

S: Yes.

T: “in”, “im”, “non”, “un” all means not, and by adding these prefixes into a word, we will get what kind of new word?

S: We will get a new word, which has the opposite meaning of the former one.

T: Very good, and we call these prefixes as negative prefixes. Now open your books to page40, tell me which of the following words have negative prefixes?

S: “nonstop” “”unfold”, “incorrect”, “unlucky”, “impossible”.

T: Very good, open your books to page 117, and do exercise 2.

(check the answers after a few minutes)

T: In this class, we’ve learned the usages of some negative prefixes. They are “in”, “im”, “un”, and “non”,we can use them to change some words to their opposites. After class please collect more words with negative prefixes. So much for today, see you.

The Fifth Period (grammar)

Teaching Aims:

1. Understand the Restrictive Attributive Clause and the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

2. Learn more about attributive clause.

Teaching Important Points:

1. Master the Restrictive Attributive Clause and the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

2. Master when to use “which” and when to use “that” in attributive clauses, and the differences between “as” and “which”.

Teaching Difficult Point:

1. How to help students tell the differences between the Restrictive Attributive Clause and the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

Teaching Methods:

1. Comparative and inductive methods to tell the differences between the Restrictive Attributive Clause and the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

2. Exercise to consolidate the grammatical item.

Teaching Aids:

1. a projector

Teaching Procedures:

StepⅠ.Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

StepⅡ.Grammar

( Teacher writes the following two sentences on the Bb: I love my sister who is a nurse. I love my sister, who is a nurse.)

T: Well. Now please look at the sentences on the blackboard, what are these two sentences?

S: They are attributive clause sentences.

T: Right. And what are the differences between them?

S: There is a comma in the first sentence, but there are no commas in the second sentence.

T: Yes. So we may say in writing, we don’t use commas in the first sentence, but commas are used in the second sentence. And who can translate these two sentences?

S: 我爱我的当护士的姐姐.

我爱我的当护士的姐姐.

T: So do you think the meaning of these two sentences are the same?

S: Yes.

T: OK, let me tell you the correct answer, the first sentence means “我爱我的当护士的姐姐”, the second one means “我爱我的姐姐, 她是一个护士”. In the first sentence, she may have several sisters, but which sister does she love?

S: The sister who is a nurse.

T: Yes, the sister she loves should be a nurse. And in the second sentence, she may just get one sister, and she loves her, and also she is a nurse. The attributive clause in the first sentence is essential to the clear understanding of the noun “sister”, but in the second sentence, the attributive clause just gives us useful extra information. It is not a necessary part of the meaning of the noun “sister”. So we call the first sentence as Restrictive Attributive Clause, and the second one as Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

(show the differences between Restrictive Attributive Clause and Non-restrictive Attributive Clause on the screen)

(explain when to use Non-restrictive Attributive Clause by explain three sentences on the blackboard)

1. 先行词为专有名词或独一无二的名词

2. 名词/数词+of

(do exercise 2 on page 118)

T: Usually “that” and “which” can replace each other in a restrictive attributive clause sentence, but there are some exceptions. Look at the blackboard, and fill in the blanks.

(students’ answers: which that that which that that which which)

T: OK, look at the first sentence, there is “anything” in the sentence, when the antecedent is “anything” or “something” or “nothing”, we must use “that”, so the correct answer should be “that”.

eg. Do you have anything that is important to tell me?

T: There is a word “some” in this sentence, when the antecedent is modified by “all” “some” “any” “no” “not” “every” “each”, we must use “that”.

eg. I have some books that are very good.

T: When the antecedent is modified by the superlative degree of a adjective or a ordinal number, we must use “that”, so we should fill in “that” in the third sentence.

This is the first book that I bought myself.

The biggest bird that I caught is this bird.

T: The next sentence, the antecedent is modified by “the very”, so we should fill in “that”. When the antecedent is modified by “the very”, “the only”, “the last”, “the next”, we must use “that”.

eg. This is the very book that I lost yesterday.

T: When the antecedent has person and object, we should use “that”.

eg. I won’t forget the things and the persons that I saw.

eg. Mary has a book, which is very precious.

eg. This is a house in which lives an old man.eg. That dog which I found in the street belongs to Mary.Fill in the blanks with suitable relative pronouns.

1. This is the only book ____ I got last year.

2. Is this the book in ____ you are interested?

3. This is the largest animal ____ Tom saw in the zoo.

4. Rose still remembers the trees and teachers____ exist (存在)in the mother school.

5. All the desks ____ are bought look really wonderful.

6. Do you have any money ____is used to build the factory?

7. Tom has a toy, ____ was given by his father.

8. This is the second watch ____ my father bought for me.

eg. As we all know, he is a famous scientist.

He is a diligent boy, as is expected.

She has the same book as you have.________everyone knows, it is necessary to build a hospital in this small town.(as/which)

It is necessary to build a hospital in this small town, _________ is clear to us.(as/which)

Our department will hold the meeting,________ is known by us.(as/which)

She got the same expensive pen _________ you have.(as/which)

篇5：人教版高一上英语教案Unit 6 Good manners(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

I. Teaching aims and demands学习目标和要求：

1.topic话题:

1>Learn about good table manners

2>Learn to make apologies

3>Learn to express your gratitude

4>Make a contrast study on table manners in Chinese and Western cultures

5>Be a student with good manners

2.function功能:

Apologising &Expressing thanks 道歉与致谢:

Excuse me. Forgive me. I’m (very/so/terribly) sorry.

That’s all right. /That’s OK. / No problem I apologise for …

Oh, well, that’s life. I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to …

Oops. Sorry about this. Thank you. It’s beautiful.

3.vocabulary词汇:

interrupt, apologize/apologise, fault, introduce, apology, forgive, culture, manner(s), impression, toast, behave, napkin, roll, dessert, unfold, lap, damp, cloth, custom, starter, pray, course, breast, flesh, bone, raise, advice, spirit, impolite, mix, wing, extra, childhood, stare, disabled

leave out, stare at, make jokes about sb.

4.grammar语法:

The Attributive Clause (3) 定语从句:

1>能够用英语描述人物、事件、时间、地点、原因等 – 使用限制性定语从句： I spent the whole afternoon with the teacher who was very helpful.

2>能够用英语对特定的人物、事件、时间、地点等作补充说明 – 使用非限制性定语从句：

I spent the whole afternoon with the teacher, which was helpful.

5.language usage语言运用

运用所学语言，围绕礼节或用餐礼仪这一话题，完成教材和练习册中的听、说、写的任务；阅读课文 “Table manners at a dinner party” 并联系生活中的实际，书写一篇目短文。

II. Difficult points 难点

III. Main teaching aids教具: A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards

Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法:

1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.

2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the 限listening material.

3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class

Ⅴ. Periods: 7-8 periods.

Ⅵ. Teaching procedures 教学过程

Period 1

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

Talk about the teaching plan for this unit and at the same time tell the students the teaching aims and demands. During this period, do WARMING-UP, LISTENING, SPEAKING.

2. WARMING-UP

Introduction Good manners are basically as set of behaviours that people may reasonably expect. Such expectations exist in various domains of our lives, both in the things we say, and how to express them, and in the ways we socially interact with others. Displaying good behaviour makes a world of difference in the way people regard us. In language that means that saying the right thing at the right moment and being polite are important. The warming up exercise introduces a few short expressions in everyday conversation, which may at first seem very easy. Surely many students will already be somewhat familiar with some of them. However, it should be emphasized that using these expressions is very important in everyday life. They are frequently used in many different situations, and they are all very informal.

Instruction Ask the students to work in pairs. Tell the students to look at the pictures on the right and practise the short conversations, using the phrases in the middle column. These phrases are of course mixed up, so students have to look at the picture, imagine the situation and then have a logical short dialogue.

Answers to the exercise:

1 The first picture shows a student coming into the classroom.

A: Excuse me. Can I come in?

B: Sure. We've already started.

A: I'm sorry. I missed the bus.

B: That's OK. We're on page 47.

2 The second picture shows a student talking to two other people.

A: Excuse me. May I interrupt you for a moment?

B: What is it, Jordan?

A: I'm sorry, Mr. Baker. I put my homework on your desk.

3 The third picture shows a girl with an umbrella and a boy that seems upset in a canteen.

A: Hey. Be careful!

B: Oh, I'm so sorry.

A: That's all right.

4 The fourth picture shows a busy crowd at an airport or railway station. While moving through the crowd somebody gets pushed.

A: Ouch! What are you doing?!

B: I'm terribly sorry.

Extension 1 The exercise can be extended by asking students to describe what they see in each picture. Ask the students to imagine the situation and describe how they would react when something like this happens in China. Are these situations realistic?

Extension 2 Ask students to suggest similar situations in which they might use any of these four short dialogues. Ask students to describe the situation or act it out in class.

3. LISTENING

Introduction The listening exercise further explores the usage of informal and more formal ways of apologising. Friends may use informal language to apologise but if the offense, or as in case of this exercise the loss of something is considered quite serious, a somewhat more formal apology may be required, as well as repeating it.

Instruction Ask the students to close their books and listen to the tape the first time. Then ask them to open their books, and read the exercise, so that they know which information they need to find. Then listen to the tape a second time. After listening, give the students some time to fill in the blanks. Decide whether or not to let the students listen another time. If it seems difficult for the students to grasp what is being said, you may have to play the tape one or two more times.

LISTENING TEXT:

A: Hi, Cliff, I'm here about returning your bike.

B: So, it was you who took it.

A: Yeah, we're friends, so I thought it would be OK.

B: Well, listen here. I want you to ask me first.

A: Oh, I'm sorry. I only used it to get to school because I was late.

B: That's OK. Just ask me next time, will you?

A: Yes, well, there is a bit of a problem.

B: What is it?

A: I really have to apologise. It's about your bike.

B: What is it about my bike? Where is it?

A: That's the problem. I'm really very sorry, but it was stolen while I was at school. B: Stolen? Didn't you lock it?

A: Of course I locked it. Here's the key. But when I came back it was gone. I'm really very sorry. I suppose I should pay for it.

B: Oh, that's all right. I guess it wasn't really your fault, was it?

A: Thanks a lot, Bill. I'm really sorry about the bike.

B: That's OK. Forget it. It was an old bike anyway.

Answers to the exercise:

1 1 Taking the bike without asking. 2 Losing the bike.

2 Oh, I'm sorry.

3 That's OK.

4 I really have to apologise.

5 Oh, that's all right. That's OK. Forget it.

6 I am really sorry about the bike.

4. SPEAKING

Introduction In the speaking exercise it is the turn of the students to practise making apologies. The students are presented with three everyday situations that may all occur at a party. Most of these situations involve quite common, ordinary mistakes, for which there is no need to make elaborate excuses. Saying the right thing at the right moment will do.

To help the students practise a few different expressions, a list of useful expressions is given. Both the apologies and the possible answers are given in descending order of formality, where “Forgive me. I'm very sorry” is quite formal while “Oops. Sorry about that” says the same thing in a very informal, casual way. The appropriate level of formality is determined by the situation, and in fact it would be equally silly to use a very formal apology in an informal setting as it would be to use a very informal apology in a formal situation. To help the students understand, some sample dialogues are provided in this book.

Instruction Tell the students that for the exercise they have to imagine themselves at a party. There are lots of people and all the, chairs are taken or covered with coats or bags while all the tables are full of glasses and snacks. Everybody is in a good mood, so nobody will get angry about anything, but of course people politely talk to each other and make excuses when troubling others. Next, ask the students to work in pairs and consider the following three situations. Ask them to read each situation carefully and make sure that they all understand it. Then ask the students to make up a short dialogue, to solve each specific small problem smoothly and in a polite manner. Possible sample dialogues are given below.

Sample Dialogue 1:

A: Aren't you going to introduce me to him?

B: Oh, forgive me. I didn't know you hadn't met. Donna, this is Alex.

A: Hi, Mex. Nice to meet you.

Sample Dialogue 2:

A: Are these seats free?

B: No, I'm sorry. My friend is sitting here.

A: That's OK.

Sample Dialogue 3:

A: Oh, was that your glass?

B: As a matter of fact, yes.

A: I'm terribly sorry. Can I offer you something else?

B: That would be nice, thanks. I'll have another Sprite.

Extension Ask the students to continue with other situations which may all take place at parties. A sample dialogue is given below.

Sample Dialogue 4:

A: Oops. Did I do that? Sorry about that.

B: Next time, watch out, will you?

Sample Dialogue 5:

A: Ouch! You are standing on my toes.

B: Oh, I'm terribly sorry about that.

A: Never mind. Just make sure it doesn't happen again.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Preview the reading text

2. Learn the new words and expressions by heart.

3. Get ready to be examined in the speaking activities.

Period 2

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the speaking activities.

2. During this period, do some reading.

2. PRE-READING

Introduction Our social interaction with other people is ruled by manners and conventions, whether we are aware of it or not. Both in formal and informal situations our behaviour is governed by what we know the others will expect us to say and do. Saying nothing or doing just the wrong thing may ruin a situation or at least make people uncomfortable. Even in more fortunate circumstances, misunderstanding rules of politeness or good manners may lead other people to look on you in certain unfavourable ways. Good manners are even more difficult when no language is involved. Because of cultural differences and a lack of knowledge or awareness of differences between cultures, we may say or do things that our foreign friends disapprove of 'or frown upon. Whereas the differences between for example French and German manners are relatively small, the cultural differences between China and most English-speaking countries are so big that Westerners may experience a culture shock when coming to China or other Asian countries. To know more about some Western customs regarding a formal dinner is therefore truly useful.

Up until around the 1950s or 1960s families who considered themselves decent would buy and study guidebooks about etiquette and good manners. Ever since the 1960s the concern for formal manners has decreased. Of course many people still have certain notions about what one is supposed to do and say in certain situations, but most people are fairly relaxed about that. However, in the diplomatic service and on formal occasions, especially formal and business dinners, receptions and other official functions, proper etiquette is still expected. So, managers want to know about good manners, and for this reason books on good manners keep coming out.

Instruction The pre-reading exercise explores Chinese cultural patterns in four different situations. The types of expected behaviour in these situations can be viewed as showing good manners. Most probably all students will be able to describe the expected behaviour. The only difficulty may lie in their ability to express themselves in English. For guidance, please refer to the sample answers below. Of course, these answers are not conclusive. Encourage students to give, more than one answer, elaborate and discuss differences of opinion.

篇6：学习手册Unit9 Technology(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

=●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

creative,decide,image,add to,latest,remind,obey,dare,spend,call of,whatever,material,in the way,survive,allow,defeat,force,instead,succeed,imagine,describe,solve,call phone,mobile,role,

function,behavior,disturb,emergency,wear,shape,rule,wonder,expect,culture

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

I think …

-What does it looks like?

-It looks like…

Ⅲ.语法学习被动语态的进行时的用法。

●学习障碍

Ⅰ.单词及短语

decide,word,add to,remind,allow,spend,call for,wear,material,in the way,defeat,force,succeed,

imagine,example,popular,dare

Ⅱ.语法

被动语态的进行时

●学习策略

Ⅰ.单词及短语部分

1.decide v.-decision n.

纵向归纳法：

(1)decide to do sth.

(2)make a decision

(3)make up one's mind

(4)determine to do sth.（强调动作）

We have determined to get the work done before October 1.

(5)be determined to do sth.(determined起形容词作用，说明一种状态，即：坚定不移的决心)

2.word

纵向归纳法：

(1)word 字，词；言语，话

He is a man of few words.(=He doesn't say much.)

(2)word 信息，消息

There's been no word from her for weeks.

(3)word 简短的交谈；谈话

Can I have a few words with you/a word with you?

I heard that they had words with each other.（我听说他们吵嘴了。）

3.add to

横向比较法：

（1）add A to B：把A加到B上/里

If you add 5 to 5,you get 10.

She added sugar to her tea.

(2)add to:增加，加强

This adds to our difficulties.

(3)add up to ①（数量）总计……；②（总起来看）说明……

The money I spend every month adds up to 1 000 yuan.

综合运用法：

Can you tell me what five ________,eighty is,boy?

A.adds B.added to

C.adds up D.adds up to

答案：B 指“加”。数学上的“加”可以用：and,plus和add to。

4.remind

纵向归纳法：

(1)remind sb. (of sth.):提醒……，使……想起……

I've forgotten his name ________ will you remind me of it?

(2)remind sb. to do sth.：提醒

Remind me to write to Mother.

(3)remind sb. that+从句：提醒

She reminded me that I hadn't written to Mother.

横向比较法：

需要用介词of的动词还有：

(1)warn sb. of sth.:警告，提醒

Warn him of the danger.

(2)inform sb. of sth.：通知，告知

I wasn't informed of the decision until too late.

(3)rob sb. of sth.：抢劫

The man robbed the old lady of her bag.

5.spend

纵向归纳法：

(1)spend 消磨（时间），度过（时间）

We spent our holiday in Beijing.

(2)spend 用（钱），花费

Would you spend $200 on a new coat?

Would you spend $200 (in) buying a new coat?

横向比较法：

“花费，用（钱）”在英语中一共有四个词：spend,pay,cost,take

(2)sb.+pay+金钱+for+sth.

(3)sth. cost sb.+金钱

I spend 20 yuan on the book/(in) buying the book.

I paid 20 yuan for the book.

The book cost me 20 yuan.

It took me 20 yuan to buy the book.

联系语境法：

Saving the boy ________ him his life.

A.lost B.cost

C.valued D.spent

答案：B “cost”除了指“花费”，还指“使……付出……代价”解。

6.in the way

纵向归纳法：

(1)in the way 妨碍，挡路，用……方法

That chair is in the way.Move it please.

I did the experiment in the way you told me.

横向比较法：

(1)on the way (to)

①在往（回）……的路上

I will come to Paris on my way back to England.

②(引起表语)即将到来（运到）

Better weather is on the way.

The new machine you ordered is on its way.

③(引起表语)正在走向

He is on the way to success.

(2)in this/that way 这样/那样

In this way,you can get rid of the flies.

(3)by the way 顺便说一句

Oh,by the way,have you seen John lately?

(4)by way of 经由，取道

I came by way of London.

(5)in a way 在某种程度上；in some way(s) 在某（些）方面，在某种程度上

The work is well done in a/some way.

(6)in no way 怎么也不，一点也不

We can in no way allow this to happen.

综合运用法：

（1）________from Paris to London,the plane stopped.

(2)I cooked this ________ you showed me.

(3)________,where is my coat?

(4)Yes,________he has been very successful.

(5)Children get ________ during the holidays.

答案：(1)On the way (2)in the way (3)By the way (4)in a way (5)in the way

7.example

纵向归纳法：

(1)take sth. for example 以……为例

Take health for example,it can't be lost.

(2)set an example to sb. 为……树立榜样

Lei Feng set a good example to us.

(3)for example=for instance/for example=e.g.

突破定式法：

改错：Parents should set a good example for their children.

答案：把for改成to。

8.imagine 想像，设想

纵向归纳法：

(1)imagine+n.

Can you imagine life on the moon?

(2)imagine+从句

You can't imagine how I missed the bird.

(3)imagine+动名词

Try to imagine being on the moon.

横向比较法：

(1)imagination n.想像，想像力

The difficulty is beyond my imagination.

(2)imaginative adj.富于想像的；善于想像的

This is imaginative writing.

(3)imaginary adj. 想像的，虚构的

All the characters in this book are imaginary.

9.force

纵向归纳法：

(1)force v.

强制，强迫，迫使

The soldiers forced their prisoners to give up their arms.

强行，突破

I've lost the key to my house,so I'll have to force an entry.（破门而入）

压入，挤入

It's foolish to force your foot into a shoe that's too small for you.

强作，勉强做出

Although he was in great pain,he forced a smile.

(2)force n.

力，自然力，力量

The force of the explosion broke all the windows in the building.

全力，暴力

The thief took the money from the old man by force.

武力，兵力（常用复数）

Both land and sea forces were employed in the war.

横向比较法：

(3)strength 力量，力气

10.latest adj.

横向比较法：

（1）latest adj. 最新的；也是late(晚,adj./adv.)的最高级，最晚的/地

（2）later adj./adv. 后来（的），过后。也是late的比较级。

（3）late adj./adv. 晚的/地

(4)lately adv. 最近地，与完成时连用

(5)later adj. 后者的，后面的 the former（前者），the latter（后者）

联系语境法：

用late的适当形式填空

(1)I was ________ for the meeting.

(2)His ________ novel(小说) is a great success.

(3)I'll call you again ________.

(4)I haven't seen him ________.

(5)He often sits up ________ at night.

(6)Two visitors came to see me.The former is Lucy and the ________ is Jim.

答案：（1）late (2)latest (3)lat

篇7：学习手册Unit8 Sports(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

、●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

interest,hobby,stand for,well-known,score(v.),beat,tie,would rather,compete,allow,born,join in,rank,host(v.),prepare,light(v.),in preparation for,honour,responsibility,effect,by hand,skill,live one's dream,professional,in one's eyes

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

Which do you like/prefer,…or…?

What your favourite sport?

Which sport do you like best?

Are you interested in…?

Sure.Yes,very much./No,not very.

I'd rather watch it than play it.

Ⅲ.语法

学习将来时被动语态

●学习障碍

Ⅰ.单词及短语

interest,score,beat,tie,would rather,allow,join in,prepare,honour,effect

Ⅱ.语法

将来时的被动语态

●学习策略

Ⅰ.单词及短语部分

1.interest

纵向归纳法：

(1)interest n.兴趣；爱好

He no longer takes any interest in his stamp collection.

Her main interests in life are music,tennis,and cooking.

(2)interest vt.对……感兴趣

That's a topic that interests me greatly.

(3)interesting adj.有趣的

That's an interesting book.

(4)interested adj.（对……）感到有兴趣的

Are you interested in history?

有些动词有两种分词形容词,-ing表示“使人感到……的”，-ed表示“（人）对……感到……的”。

如：tire,surprise,excite,puzzle,encourage,frighten,move,disappoint,satisfy,please,astonish等。联系语境法：

用puzzle的适当形式填空：

His ________ look suggested he felt ________at the ________ question.

答案：puzzled,puzzled,puzzling 表示人流露出的表情、声音（如look,expression,voice）用-ed形容词修饰。

2.score

纵向归纳法：

(1)score n.（比赛、考试）分数

What's my score?

(2)二十

I want two score of eggs.

(3)scores (of)许多（的）

-How many people were there?

-There were scores (of them).

score v. 得（分）

She scored 120 in the IQ test.

横向比较法：

(1)dozen n. 十二

I want two dozen eggs.

(2)dozens （of）许多（的）

联系语境法：

(1)改错:He got 80 scores out of 100 for geography.

答案：scores改为marks。mark“分”，score“分数”。此句还可说“He made a score of 80 out of 100 for geography.”

(2)There are ________ eggs left in the refrigerator.

A.3 dozen B.3 scores of

C.3 score D.3 dozen of

答案：A score和dozen表示“二十”“十二”时，单复数同形，而且“score”后需有“of”再接名词。B、C选项若是“3 score of”就是正确的。

3.tie v.

纵向归纳法：

(1)tie （用绳等）固定

I tied the sticks together.

(2)tie 打成平局

The two teams tied for the first place.

横向比较法：

(1)fix v. 使固定

He fixed the picture on the wall.

(2)fasten v. 使牢固

Fasten a horse to a tree.

联系语境法：

用介词填空：

(1)He tied the book ________ string.

(2)He tied the dog ________ a tree.

答案：（1）with (2)to 第一句指“用”绳捆，第二句表示“把狗捆到树上”。“把……和……固定到一起”为“tie…to…”。

4.would rather 宁愿

纵向归纳法：

(1)would rather (not) do

I would rather stay here.

(2)would rather 接从句（从句用虚拟语气）

I would rather you told me the truth now.

(3)would rather do …than do 宁愿……也不愿……

He would rather play than work.

横向比较法：

It's time,wish和would you mind接从句时，从句也需虚拟语气。

击破定式法：

(1)I wish I ________ a bird.

A.am B.were C.was

(2)It's time we ________ lunch.

A.had B.have

答案：（1）B be动词的虚拟语气用were (2)A

5.allow vt.

纵向归纳法：

(1)allow 允许

We don't allow smoking in this house.

Passengers are not allowed to smoke.

(2)allow sb. in/out/up 允许某人进入（离开，起来）

She won't allow children in until they've wiped their shoes.

(3)allowance n. 津贴，零用钱

I didn't receive any allowance from my father.

横向比较法：

permit v.

(1)permit 允许（与allow,forbid和advise用法相同：直接加“-ing” 或加“sb. to do”） (2) permit 使（某事物）有可能性

The windows permit light and air to enter.

(3)permit /′p:mit/ n.通行证

We cannot enter the base without a permit.

(4)permission n. 允许，许可

They entered the area without permission.

联系语境法：

The heavy rain forbade me ________ to school.

A.from my coming B.to come

C.come D.my coming

答案：B

6.join in

纵向归纳法：

（1）join in 参加（活动）

Can I join in (the game)?

(2)join sb.(in doing/to do sth.) 与某人一起做某事

He joined us to sing “Happy Birthday” to the teacher.

(3)join…to/onto… 连结

The island is joined to the mainland by a bridge.

(4)join up 参军

We both joined up in 1939.

联系语境法：

During the break she began to sing an English song and we all ________.

A.took part in B.joined C.joined in 答案：C A选项take part in需要接宾语，而join in可接宾语也可不接。

7.prepare v.

纵向归纳法：

(1)prepare sth.准备

I have a speech to prepare.

(2)prepare for sth.为……做准备

Hope for the best and prepare for the worst.

(3)be prepared for 为……做好准备

They are prepared for the worst.

(4)be prepared to do 准备做/愿意做某事

He is prepared to leave the country.

He wasn't prepared to help me.

(5)make preparations for 为……做准备

She is making preparations for her marriage.

(6)in preparation for

They put chairs in the hall in preparation for the concert.

联系语境法：

Bob ________ the coming test while his mother ________ supper.

A.prepared B.prepared for

答案：B，A prepare接准备的事物；如“lesson,meal”等；prepare for接名词表目的，“为……做准备”，如“test,party”等。

8.honour n.

纵向归纳法：

(1)honour 光荣，荣幸，荣誉

My great-grandfather won honour in the war.

(2)honour 尊敬，敬重

One must show honour to one's parents.

(3)in honour of 为了纪念（……）

This monument was built in honour of the general.

击破定式法：

改错：It is great honour to be invited.

答案：在“great”加前“a”。honour指“荣誉，光荣”不可数，但指具体的“使人感到光荣的人或事”则可数，常用单数。

Ⅱ.语法部分将来时被动语态的用法

纵向归纳法：

（1）结构：will/shall be done

be to be done

be going to be done

He will teach us English soon.→We will be taught English (by him) soon.

He is to hold a birthday party.→A birthday party is to be held (by him).

She is going to name the child Lucy.→The child is going to be named Lucy.

(2)短语动词应看作一个整体不能分开

I will take care of the child.→The child will be taken care of.

Everybody is to hand in their homework.→Homework is to be handed in. (3)won't+及物动词作不及物动词用，表示事物的性质、特点。常用此主动表被动结构的动词有act,bend,burn,wash,lock,cut,read,close,open等。

The door won't lock.

This wood won't burn.

This saw won't cut.

横向比较法：

将来时的被动语态应注意以下几点：

（1）表示将来发生的行为或存在的状态，常与soon,tomorrow (morning…);next week(year…）,some day,from now on,the day after tomorrow,in(the) future等表示将来的时间状语连用。

●方法实践

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.I've visited a lot of different places and stayed in lots of different hotels,but none of them ________ this one.

A.makes B.beats

C.compares D.matches

2.-How much is the T-shirt ________?

-65 dollars.

A.worth B.cost

C.worthy D.paid

3.________ full preparations,we decided to put off the meeting till next week.

A.We did not make B.Having not made

C.We had not made D.Not having made

4.-Have you ever been to Rome?

-No,but that's the city ________.

A.where I most like to visit

B.I'd most like to visit

C.which I like to visit most

D.where I'd like most to visit

5.-________ in the workshop,please stop it.

-Sorry,I ________.

A.Not smoking;am not sure

B.Don't smoke;have no idea

C.Smoking is not allowed;don't know

D.Smoking is forbidden;didn't know

6.The teacher took the naughty boy by surprise and he ________ to think of an excuse.

A.had no time B.managed

C.was prepared D.was afraid

7.China,the world's most populous nation,________ the WTO on November 10,,

________ China a new place at the table of nations.

A.attended;given B.joined;offering

C.joined;offered D.took part in;giving

8.Although she had the hope of winning the first prize in the oral English contest,the girl refused to ________ in it.

A.take part B.join it

C.play a part in D.act part

9.-Were you busy last weekend?

-Very.Rather than ________ time playing cards as usual,I devoted every effort to ________ an advertisement.

A.waste;make B.wasting;making

C.to waste;make D.a waste of;making

10.________ the big snake,the little girl stood under the tree ________ out of her life.

A.Seeing;frightened B.Seeing;frightening

C.Seen;frightened D.To see;frightening

11.He was so excited that he could say nothing but hold his sister's hand firmly.His sister said nothing either,________ tears coming into her face.

A.surprising B.surprised

C.exciting D.excited

12.I ________ it myself ________ your homework.

A.prefer to do;rather than copy

B.prefer doing;than copy

C.would do;rather than copy

D.would rather do;than to copy

13.-She seems a ________ waitress.

-Yes,each of us always feels ________ with her good manners and service.

A.pleased;pleased B.pleasant;pleasant

C.pleased;pleasant D.pleasant;pleased

14.The Foreign Minister walked on the platform,seated himself in a chair and ________ for answering questions.

A.had prepared B.being prepared

C.prepared D.preparing

15.She had a nature that quickly ________ the friendship of her classmates.

A.made B.won

C.caught D.seized

16.-You tie looks smart.It ________ with your shirt perfectly.

-Thanks.I'm glad you like it.

A.matches B.meets

C.agrees D.goes

17.You may not understand it,but this is a kind of thing we policemen ________ as a secret.

A.think of B.think of it

C.think it over D.think about

18.John had ________ me to do this,but he didn't.

A.promised B.allowed

C.permitted D.told

19.Do you mind if I leave the window open?Well,I'd rather you ________.

A.don't B.didn't

C.won't D.mustn't

20.It's time that you ________ the whole book.

A.must go over B.can you over

C.went over D.have gone over

21.Shortly after the accident,two ________ police were sent to the spot to keep order.

A.dozen of B.dozens

C.dozen D.dozens of

22.He went to the market and bought ________ the eggs I told him to buy.

A.three dozen of B.three dozen

C.three dozens D.three dozens of

23.The new law will come into ________ on the day it is passed.

A.effect B.use

C.sevice D.existence

24.The class named ________ Lei Feng is one of the best classes in this school.

A.in honour of B.in the place of

C.in favor of D.in the way of

25.Will you ________ me ________ out this problem myself?

A.permit;working B.let;work

C.allowed;to work D.forbid;to work

Ⅱ.完形填空

After lunch,without permission from parents,the two boys set off to explore the part of the beach which lay beyond the headland（陆岬，伸出海面尖形高地）.They had persuaded their young sister to 1 ,saying that the long walk would be too 2 for her.Once they had got in the headland,the beach reached away endless before them.It was like 3 a new world.There were damp,dark caves to 4 ,there were many 5 among the rocks,full of sea creatures(生物);and,here and there along the beach were those 6 objects,washed up and 7 by the tide.

The afternoon passed 8 .The sun was already 9 when the boys reluctantly (恋恋不舍地) 10 to make their 11 homewards.But long before they reached the headland,they could see that the tide had come in so suddenly that they were now 12 from either end of the beach.Their only chance of 13 was to find a way up the cliff(悬崖) nearby. They soon found a narrow path 14 the cliff top.But half way up,their path was 15 by a large rock which they could not climb 16 .The two boys had to 17 at the top of their voices, 18 that someone might 19 over the top of the rock,and finally came their father with two policemen. 20 of them climbed down a rope which was lowered over the rock.The boys were then pulled to safety,and thus saved from spending a miserable night on the cliff.

1.A.keep quiet B.stay behind

C.take a rest D.join them

2.A.tiring B.exciting

C.uninteresting D.impossible

3.A.discovering B.facing

C.enjoying D.imagining

4.A.look up B.explore

C.hide in D.search

5.A.lakes B.rivers

C.water falls D.pools

6.A.dirty B.light

C.strange D.clean

7.A.moved B.covered

C.beaten D.left

8.A.quickly B.unexpectedly

C.finally D.suddenly

9.A.leaving B.dropping

C.going D.setting

10.A.forgot B.decided

C.succeeded D.turned

11.A.road B.way

C.track D.path

12.A.cut off B.left behind

C.held back D.put away

13.A.running off B.keeping clear

C.getting away D.turning to

14.A.reaching B.passing

C.going up D.leading to

15.A.blocked B.covered

C.stopped D.filled

16.A.on B.over

C.round D.through

17.A.shout B.shoot

C.repeat D.renew

18.A.wanting B.guessing

C.believing D.hoping

19.A.turned B.appeared

C.hid D.climbed

20.A.Any B.None

C.One D.First

Ⅲ.短文改错

I can't swim because I have a strong fear of water.

Look back at my childhood experience,I think 1.________

that three reason might explain the fear.The first reason 2.________

is that I was not allowed to go near the water 3.________

when I was a child,for my mother had unreasonable 4.________

fear of it.So,even as a child I was taught see 5.________

the water as something danger.Second,my eyes 6.________

became bad ones when I was five.If I took off 7.________

my glasses in the water,I couldn't see anything,but 8.________

this increased my fear.The worst part of your experience 9.________

is that as a child of ten I see a neighbor drowned. 10.________

Since then I have more frightened.

Ⅳ.书面表达

上面六幅图记载的是Peter上星期五早上在上学路上经历的事情。你是《上海学生英文报》的学生记者，你目睹了这一过程。请你将这一过程整理成文字发表在报纸上。

注意：

1.短文应包括所有图画内容；

2.词数在100字左右。

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习（将来时被动语态）

1.You are not to leave ________.

A.except you are told B.as you are told

C.until you will be told D.until you are told

2.A new cinema ________ here.They hope to finish it next month.

A.will be built B.is built

C.has been built D.is being built

3.It's reported that a new school ________ here next year.

A.would be set up B.was going to set up

C.will be set up D.is going to set up

4.The judge ordered that the thief ________ punished.

A.would be B.were to be

C.should be D.must be

5.I insist that a doctor ________ immediately.

A.has been sent for B.will be sent for

C.be sent for D.sent for

6.I promise that the matter ________.

A.be taken care B.will be taken care of

C.will take care of D.has been taken care

7.The volleyball match ________ if it ________.

A.will put off;rains B.will be put off;will rain

C.will be put off;rains D.is to put off;rains

8.-Are you going to the movies tonight?

-Yes.By then this painting ________.

A.is finished B.would be finished

C.will have been finished D.will finish

9.He can certainly buy a new house if more ________ next year.

A.will be built B.are built

C.have built D.built

10.The next morning the boy ________ lying in bed,dead.

A.was found B.has found

C.will be found D.found

11.The sports meet ________.

A.is put off B.is to put off

C.is to be put off D.puts off

12.It is said that he ________ sent to Austria to improve his English.

A.would be B.was to be

C.had been D.had been

13.I shall have finished reading the novel by dinner time.=This novel ________ reading (by me) by dinner time.

A.must be finished B.ought to have finished

C.shall be finished D.will have been finished

14.You are about to write a poem,aren't you?=A poem (by you),________?

A.is about to be written,aren't you

B.is about to be writing;isn't it

C.is about to be writing;aren't you

D.is about to be written;isn't it

15.The novel ________ by the time the author comes back from abroad.

A.will have published B.will be published

C.will have been published D.have been published

16.The maths problem ________ among the students soon.

A.is going to to have been discussed

B.is to discuss

C.is about to discuss

D.is going to be discussed

17.All the homework ________ before class is over.

A.will hand in B.has to be handed in

C.are handed D.is going to be handed

18.-Where is George going this afternoon?

-He ________ to see the newly-built factory.

A.is taken B.is to be taken

C.will taken D.is going to take

19.An exhibition of paintings ________ at the museum next week.

A.are to be held B.is to be held

C.will hold D.are holding

20.-Did you telephone the governor's office?

-Yes,he ________ back before tomorrow noon.

A.expects B.is expected

C.will be expected D.is to expect

参考答案

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.D match表示“与……相匹敌”。

2.A be worth接钱数。

3.D 逗号分开两部分，没有连词，所以前半句不是句子，而是状语。v.-ing作状语，否定时not在前。

4.B 定语从句修饰the city。关系词在从句中作visit宾语，可以省略。

5.D B、C、D第一个空的答案都可以。“我”过去不知道，现在知道了，故选D。

6.A 据题意，老师让这个小男孩很吃惊，所以他“没有时间想出借口”。

7.B attend表示“出席”；take part in表“参加（活动）”；join表“加入（组织）”。-ing表伴随，表结果。

8.A take part (in sth.)参加。

9.B 本句应用rather than doing to doing，表示“比起做……更愿意做……”。

10.A 分词作状语，主动或被动由主语决定，主语the girl与see是主动关系，故用seeing。

-ed形容词表“使人感到……”。

11.D 据题意，姐弟二人都很兴奋。-ed形容词接tears,look，voice等表示“人流露出……的”眼泪，表情。

12.A prefer to do rather than do，表示“愿……也不愿……”。

13.D pleased表示“人感到满意的/高兴的”，pleasant表示“（使人/令人）愉快的”。

14.C and并列连接的是两个词语，seated…和prepared…。

15.B win表“赢得”。seize表“抓住”。

16.D match表“与……相配”时，是及物动词，不用with。“go with”表示“与……配合良好”“与……协调”。

17.A think of sth. as…表示“认为某事……”。

18.A

19.B would rather接从句时，从句用虚拟语气。

20.C It's time接从句时，从句用虚拟语气。

21.C dozen表“十二”时，用作单数，直接接名词。若名词前有冠词或指示代词则需加of。

22.A

23.A come into effect表示“开始生效”。came into use表示“开始被使用”。

24.A in honour of表示“为了纪念……”；in favour of 表示“赞成，支持……”。

25.B permit sb. to do;let sb. do。C选项allow时态错误。

Ⅱ.完形填空

1.B 从上下文看，A、C、D不符合，故不选。

2.A 上文说劝阻young sister不去，只能说long walk would be too tiring。

3.B 通过上下文看，facing是作like的宾语。表示“面对”的意思。

4.B explore指探索。

5.D 岩石间应是pools。

6.C two boys没有见过海里的东西，故选strange。

7.D 被潮水冲上来，并留下的东西用leave。

8.A quickly可指时间过得飞快。

9.D 太阳落山用set。

10.B 没有turn to do这个搭配，succeed in doing,forget to do语境不对。

11.A make one's road homewards指找道回家。 12.A

13.C get away指逃走，离开，run off吓跑，撵走。turn back返回，打退堂鼓，故选C。 14.D reach指到达，lead指通向。

15.A be blocked指阻塞。

16.B climb over the rock指爬上岩石。

17.A shout at the top of one's voice指高声地喊。

18.D hoping 表伴随，希望。

19.B appear指希望某人出现在岩石上。

20.C one of them,them指their father and two policemen。

Ⅲ.短文改错

1.Look→Looking 2.reason→reasons 3.√ 4.had后加an 5.taught后加to 6.danger→dangerous 7.去掉ones 8.but→and 9.your→my 10.see→saw

Ⅳ.书面表达

On the morning of last Friday,Peter went to school as usual.He was walking along the road when he saw a well which was not covered.He thought it was dangerous for passers-by,so he decided to cover the well.The cover was so heavy that he took great trouble to remove it.At last he covered the well with difficulty.Hardly had he turned his back and gone when he heard a cry for help coming from the well.So he returned to the well and moved the cover away.To his surprise,a worker was inside the well.Peter tried his best to pull the worker out of the well.After that Peter covered the well again.

Ⅴ.同步语法

1.D 时间状语从句一般现在时表将来。

2.D 据题意“他们希望下个月建完新电影院”，可知电影院正在被建。

3.C D选项若改为is going to be set up，则正确。

4.C order表“命令”接从句时，从句用（should） do，故不选其他项。

5.C insist此句中表示“坚决要求”，从句用（should） do。医生与send for是被动关系。 6.B take care of是固定短语，变被动时应作为一体。

7.C

8.C by短语作状语时，句子用完成时，故选C。

9.B

10.A the next morning是过去时间状语，表“第二天早晨”。

11.C 将来时被动语态be to be done。

12.C 主句为现在时，从句与其保持一致，故不选A、B、D。

13.D by短语与完成时搭配。此题是把主动语态变为被动语态。主动语态为将来时，变为被动时时态不变。

14.D 主动变被动时态不变。被动句中，主语为a poem,故反义疑问句用isn't it。

15.C by短语与完成时搭配，且novel与publish是被动关系。

16.D problem与discuss是被动关系。时间状语soon表明用将来时态。

17.B hand in表示“上交”，变为被动时应视为一体，故不选D。

18.B He与take是被动关系，表示“他将被带去参观新建的工厂”。

19.B exhibition(展览)与hold是被动关系。

20.B expect表“期待”。he指the governor,别人expect the governor back,所以he与expect是被动关系。谈话当时别人就期待着了，故不用将来时。

篇8：高一英语上册unit6教案（全）-人教版[全套]

Unit 6 Good Manners

Teaching Plan

I. Teaching Goals:

1. Talk about good table manners

2. Learn to make apologies.

3. Learn to express your gratitude

4. Understand the Restrictive Attributive Clause and non-Restrictive Attributive Clause

5. Write a thank-you letter

6. Be a student with good manners

II. Teaching Time: five periods

Warming-up &Listening

--Period One

I. Teaching Aims and Demands.

1) Knowledge: grasp the expressions for making apologies

2) Abilities: ①learn to apologize and response properly to others’ apologies;

②learn to focus on key words and important sentences while listening

3) Moral: Be a student with good manners

II. Key and Difficult points

1) Master the ways of making apologies by speaking and listening

2) Use the expressions to make apologies freely

III. Teaching Methods

1) Pair work to practice speaking

2) Listen-answering activity to train the Ss’ listening ability

IV. Teaching Aids

A computer and a courseware with a record of listening material

V. Teaching procedures

I) Lead-in (3 min)

With the beginning of quoting the proverb “courtesy costs nothing”, students are introduced the meaning of “good manners”.

T: Good morning, class!

T: Do you like any proverbs?

T: OK, today, I’d like to teach you one proverb, “Courtesy costs nothing” Have you ever heard of that?

T: It means “it is always right to have good manners.” In this unit, we are going to learn sth. all about good manners.

II) Judgment (8 min)

Before they learn anything about good manners in this unit, students are guided to join in an activity in which they judge the people’s behaviors based on their possessed experience: good manners or bad manners. There are six pictures which they have to judge from. For the first one, the teacher gives it as am example, and the last one, which shows a host urging his guest to drink more, can be expected to have two opposite answers. With this conflict of the opinions, the teacher tells students that in different countries, there are different ways to behave. So, “good manners” has different standards, too.

T: Now I would show some pictures. You should judge the behaviors in them whether it is good manners to do that. Do you understand?

T: What’s in picture 1 is it good manners or bad manners to do so?

T: Let me show you an example. “He is a boy with good manners who gives his seat to others.” Ok, what about picture two?

(Ask one student to answer)

T: Good! Thank you. But please pay attention to the sentence structure (attributive clause). Then, the next one?

(Another student answers)

T: Ok, through this group of practice, we are now clearer about what are good manners. Do you think making apologies is also a behavior of good manners?

III) Warming-up (15 min)

This part can be done in the following five steps:

(1) The pictures in the Ss’ book are also showed on ppt., and some tips are added to them.

(2) Look at the expressions in the middle column in this part, and tell Ss that they are all used to express one’s apologies or response to the apologies. Then learn the new words “interrupt(打扰，打断); I'm terribly sorry (I’m very sorry) ”

(4) Give Ss some more minutes to practice the dialogues with their partners.

(5) Then, two pairs of Ss are asked to act them out.

T: In the warming up, we will do the further exercise about making apologies and response to them. Turn to page 36 and guess what’s happened to them in the pictures, please!

(Show the tips for them to answer)

(Introduce all the four pictures)

T: Do you know these expressions in the middle column? What situations are they used in?

S: When we do sth. wrong.

T: Yes. (Show “interrupt” and “I'm terribly sorry” on blackboard.) Here “interrupt” means in Chinese “打扰，打断”, and “I'm terribly sorry” is equal to “I’m very sorry”.

T: Well, would you like to fill in the blanks with these expressions according to the pictures?

(Let them complete it)

T: Who can tell me the answers?

(Ask Ss to answer and correct them)

T: Practice the dialogues with your partner. Then I’ll ask some of you to act.

(Four minutes later)

T: Who want to act it out for us? You two, would you please?

IV) Listening (17 min)

Now it is time for Ss do the listening practice. The steps are:

(1) Leading in. Asks students questions about their own experiences, for example, whether they have some experiences that their things have been lost by others without asking, or that they have lost things borrowed from others.

(2) Listening and answering. Give Ss two questions on ppt., and begin to play the radio.

(Ss are told to listen with the questions only, and they don’t begin to write anything on the book.)

After playing the radio, I check the answers to the questions.

(3) Listening and filling in. For the second time, they should begin to do the blank-filling exercise on their books. The teacher reminds the Ss to learn to listen and catch the necessary information.

(4) Listening and checking. Now, during the third time, the teacher checks the answers with the radio playing paragraph by paragraph. Show them on ppt. and repeat the difficult sentences.

(5) Listening and over-going. If there are still any difficulties in this part, anther time is needed.

T: So do you think it good manners to apologize in a polite way?

T: Would you like to listen to another dialogue about apologizing?

T: Well, let’s do listening practice.

(Show two questions on ppt.)

① How many times does Bill apologize to Cliff?

② What are the problems between Bill &Cliff?

T: with these two questions, you listen to the radio, OK?

(Play the radio in courseware)

T: Have you got it?

(Ask some to tell and show the answers)

①Twice.

②Bill took Cliff’s bike without asking and lost it.

T: Now, let’s come to the practice on your book. I’ll play it again and you should complete the questions with the right sentences you hear in the material.

(Play it again)

T: Finished the questions? We shall check them with the radio playing paragraph by paragraph, Ok?

(The third time playing)

T: Now, are you all clear about this dialogue and the story? Any difficulties? Would you like to listen again?

Ss: Yes.

(Play it the forth time if necessary)

V) Consolidation

Review the expressions used for making apologies. Show a table of the expressions.

T: This period, we’ve learned how to make apologies and what we can say to apologize. Do you remember what the expressions are?

T: Ok, look at the form on ppt., and remember them.

(Show that on ppt.)

VI) Homework

1. Preview the text of Reading part.

2. Do exercise 4, P117 in your exercise book.

3. Think of the ways in which Chinese table manners is different from that of Western countries.

VII) Design of the Blackboard

Courtesy I’m terribly sorry

Good manners apologiz(s)e

manner forgive

interrupt fault

Reading

--Period Two

I. Teaching Aims and Demands.

1) Knowledge:

①To get to know the Western table manners

②To compare Chinese table manners with Western table manners

③To learn some useful words and expressions about table manners.

④To know how to lay the table in Western dinner party

1I) Ability

①Improve the reading ability of the students, especially the skills of summarizing and scanning.

②Train the ability of manual operation (to lay the table with cards)

II. Key and Difficult points

1) Sentences in passage with complex structure

2) What are the Western table manners

III. Teaching Methods

1) Scanning for important information and careful reading

2) Group work

IV. Teaching Aids

1) A computer and a courseware

2) Eight groups of tableware-shaped cards

V. Teaching Procedures

I) Revision

Review the ways to make apologies learned last period. Teacher shows a form of expressions for making apologies.

T: What have we learned last period? Do you remember?

T: Yes, we’ve learned the way to apologize to others, and here we can use these expressions to express that.

(Show the form of making apologies and receiving them)

II) Pre-reading

(1) The teacher refers the picture showed in last period in which a host urges his guest to drink, and ask whether it is good table manners. He told them that different countries have different table manners.

(2) With this picture, the teacher focuses his topic on the different manners between cultures. Thus, he then shows a form about “Rules for being polite in Chinese culture” and another about that in Western culture. These two forms are compared under three standards: at a dinner party, greeting your teacher and receiving a birthday present.

T: Last period, we have seen this picture, right? What’s it about?

T: Yes. A host urges his guest to drink as much as possible. Is it good manners to do so?

T; In fact, people in china have different answers from that in the Western countries. Today, we’ll learn good manners in western culture. Are you interested in that?

T: Let’s first compare the differences between them about “Rules for being polite”.

(Show two forms and explain them)

III) Reading

i) Fast reading.

Give students two questions to answer while they are reading fast:

1. What are the two spoons used for?

2. Do table manners change over time?

(Minutes later check the answers.)

ii) Learning new words.

Before they come to read the passage carefully, the teachers show some new words with two groups of pictures: food and tableware. Through these pictures, students may get to know these words soon and well.

iii) Careful reading.

(1) This is a key task of this period. During this, students are firstly given two questions, with which they read the passage carefully, and find out the answers. They are:

1. How is the table laid?

2. What is the order of the dishes served at a Western dinner party?

There is a chart of the dinner table with pieces of tableware on ppt., and they are going to find out how to lay the table.

(2) There are about five minutes for the students to read. During that, the teacher gives out the eight groups of table-shaped cards to the students. And then they can put these cards as tableware on a big card, which will show their understanding of the text about how to lay the table.

(3) After reading, the teacher calls some groups to show their works on the blackboard, compares them, and at last, decides the winners.

(4) In order to examine their grasp of the knowledge, there is now a quiz to take. Following the students’ answers to the questions, the right ones are showed in the pictures on ppt..

i) Fast reading

T: Now, we come to Reading passage. Do you know what it is about by seeing the two pictures on this page?

T: Yes, here we are going to learn sth. about table manners. From the title we see it’s about table manners at a dinner party. Well, would you like to read it and get known what’s this passage tells you?

T: Here are two questions on ppt. Read quickly and find out the answer.

(Three minutes later)

T: Have you finished?

T: Thanks. You’ve done a good job.

ii) Learning new words

T: Before we read more carefully, I want to show you two groups of new words in the passage: Food and Tableware. You can recognize and memorize them through the pictures. What do the first two pictures refer to?

Ss:

T: It refers to “toast”.

(This job can be finished quickly)

iii) Careful reading

T: So now, we can understand the passage more easily. There’re two questions here, you would read the passage carefully, and find answers to them, will you?

T: You can search the information of laying the table according to the pictures of tableware on ppt.. After reading, I’ll give out sheets of cards to lay them. Are you clear?

(Five minutes later)

T: Now, there’re eight groups of cards, here. Classmates of every three desks can share one group. Lay cards on the big board according to you understanding of the passage. Do that quickly!

(For a while )

T: Have you finished your job?

T: Who’d like to show your work?

(Show some of their works on blackboard)

T: OK, let’s see whose work is all right.

(Find out the mistakes in them and who wins)

T: Are you clear now about how to lay the table?

T: We’ll have a quiz to examine that. The question on ppt: Is the fork on the left bigger than the one on the right? What about the two knives?

T: Ok, just look at the pictures!

(Show the pictures of explaining the right position)

IV) Post-reading

(1) Paragraph 1. Analyze the first paragraph and summarize the main idea. Pay attention to the difficult sentences.

(2) Paragraph 2-5. Summarize the main idea, and check the second question: the order of the dishes. In order to let students further understand these paragraphs, the teacher list several questions about the details of this part. Then, through systematic analysis, they will get the answers.

(3) Paragraph 6. The ending paragraph tells the changing of the custom and table manners.

The teacher will point out some difficult words, like, fashion, advice, formal, etc..

T: Let’s come back to the textbook. What does the first paragraph tell us?

T: Here are difficult sentences to learn.

(Analyze them)

T: Which paragraphs can be formed into one group?

S: Paragraph 2-5

T: Pretty good. Well, can we check the answer to question two? “.Find out the right order of dishes and number them. (Exercise 2 on p39)”

T: And what about the main idea of the last paragraph. Any volunteers?

T: Good job. It tells us that “the order of dishes and good table manners during these courses”.

(Focus on some difficult words in the paragraph)

V) Homework

1. Word Study 2 on P40

2. Vocabulary 1 on P116.

3. Vocabulary 1 on P116.

VI) Design of the Blackboard

Lay the table Don’t bite more than you can chew

Para 1 drink to

Para 2-5 follow the fashion

Para 6 Behave

Reading (II) & Language Study

--Period Three

I. Teaching Aims and Demands.

(1) Study expressions and sentences with special structure such as the Restrictive Attributive Clauses and Non-Restrictive Clauses in the passage

(2) Learn the way words are changed into its opposite by adding prefixes

II. Key and Difficult points

1) Several long sentences which students may feel hard to understand

2) Grasp the four kinds of prefixes

III. Teaching Methods

Learning-practicing activity

IV. Teaching Aids

A computer and a ppt. courseware

V. Teaching Procedures

I) Reading.

The teacher explains some of the difficult or special expressions and sentences in the passage.

T: Last period, we’ve learned this passage, and we know how to behave with good manners at table, the order of the dishes in Western dinner party, the differences in toasting between Chinese and Western culture, etc.. Do you remember?

T: We now will continue to study this passage. Look at the sentences on ppt..

Show them on ppt.:

1. Knowing them will help you make a good impression.

leave impression on sb.

2.Having good table manners means knowing ,for example, how to use knives and forks ,when …to behave at the table.

Having good table manners 动名词短语做主语.

3. The knife and fork that are closest to your plate …the ones beside them.

4. In China, you sometimes get a hot, damp …, which, however, is not the custom in Western counties.

5. Dinner starts with a small dishes, which is often called a starter.

6. When drinking to someone’s health …

7. Table manners change over time. They follow the fashion of the day.

(Below is the explanation of these six sentences)

T: (1)In the first sentence, we have a verb with -ing form (gerund) as its subject. We should pay much attention to this structure. And here “make a good impression” means in Chinese “给人留下美好的印象”. And we can also say “leave impression on sb”. Remember that between the impression and sb., there is a preparation “on”.

T: (2) In this sentence, due to the gerund subject, we have the predictive in the single and third person form. Then, who can tell me what dose this long sentence mean?

T: It means in Chinese that: 在餐桌上，懂礼节意味着你知道如何使用刀叉，如何助酒以及如何在用餐时举止得当。

T: (3) This sentence is one with Restrictive Clause. In this kind of sentence, we cannot leave out the Restrictive Attributive Clause. The clause “that are closest to your plate” modifies the antecedent “the knife and fork”. “Behave oneself” means in Chinese “行为表现”. Well, who can translate the whole sentence into Chinese?

T: It means: 离你的盘子最近的刀叉比他们旁边其他的大一些。

T: (4) Here is a Non-Restrictive Attributive Clause. The clause after “which” is a supplementary part to the main clause, and the latter can also form a sentence without the former. Besides, “however” in the sentence cannot be replaced by “but”, though they both refer to the transition relation. Because “however” can be put ahead, within or at the end of a sentence, while “but” cannot; the former shows a stronger emphasis than the latter do. For example,

(1)I’d like to go with you, but my hands are full.

(2) I’d like to go with you. However, my hands are full.

T: (5) Here again is a Non-Restrictive Attributive clause. What do you think the relative pronoun “which” refers to?

T: “Which” refers to “a small dish”

The expression “start with” means in Chinese “以---开始”, and we can find one phrase opposite to it: “end up with”.

T: (6) “When drinking to someone’s health”. Here we say “drink to sth” means “wish sb. sth. When toasting”. In Chinese, we say “为某人---干杯”. Who can make a sentence with the phrase “drank to”?

T: Good job! Here I have a sentence for example, “On their wedding ceremony, we all drank to the bride and groom’s happiness. 在她们的婚礼上，我们都为新郎新娘祝酒。

T: (7) Pay attention to the preposition “over”. We say “over time” rather than “with the time”. The phrase “follow the fashion of the day” means in Chinese “随着时尚而改变”. Besides, with the word “fashion”, there are phrases like “be in the fashion”, and “be out of the fashion” meaning “流行” and “过时”.

II) Practice.

i) Make a list of things on a Western dinner table and what is found on a Chinese one.

T: We have learned some differences between Chinese and Western culture in the “Rules for being polite” in several situations. OK, what about learning some sth. more about the differences of the tableware on the dinner table?

T: Good. Please look at the form on ppt.. On the left, there is a column of tableware on a Western dinner table, which we’ve learned yesterday; and the right column, there are some pieces of tableware on a Chinese dinner table. Please compare them. What are the differences?

A Western dinner table A Chinese dinner table

a small plate;

a large plate;

a napkin;

a glass for red wine;

a glass for white wine;

a glass for water;

two pairs of forks and knives of different sizes;

a soup spoon;

a dessert spoon a bowl,

a Chinese spoon;

a small plate;

a pair of chopsticks;

a small china shelf to rest the chopsticks on;

a small tray with a damp cloth;

a small china cup for spirits;

a glass for beer or soft drinks

ii) Do the exercise3 in post-reading part: decide which of the following are polite or impolite at a Western dinner party. The teacher can read the questions and let the students find out what’s the fact according to the passage.

1. Use the knife with your right hand.

2. Put your napkin on your lap.

3. Start eating as soon as your food is served in front of you.

4. Ask for a second bowl of soup.

5. Use your finger when eating chicken.

6. Finish eating everything on your plate.

7. Talk loudly while eating.

8. Make other people drink more spirits than they can take.

Check the answers according to the passage. (P P I I P P I I)

iii) Turn to page 40, and finish the exercise 2: read the following text about table manners in China and fill in the blanks.

T: First read the text quickly and fill in the blanks with the words in the top column.

(Minutes later, check them and explain the language points if necessary)

The language points are: be mixed with: 与---混合在一起; spirit: 烈性酒 …

III) Word Study.

In this part, students are going to learn the words with negative prefixes. They are required to know which part of a word are the prefixes, and that the meaning of a word with such a prefix changes to its opposite, and also, what words match what prefixes, etc..

1. First, the teacher shows two words with negative prefixes learned in this unit, and asks questions about prefixes.

2. Then, every prefix would be explained with some examples.

3. Next, the class comes to the practice in word study.

4. Finally, it’s time to have an immediate exercise in workbook.

T: What’s in common of these two words? Unfold and impolite.

T: Yes, they are the words added with two letters and forming the new words. Then what’s the meaning of former words and the new ones? What’s their relation?

T: They are opposite to each other. Ok, what’s the two letters are? “-un” and “-im”. They are called negative prefixes, and there are other ones like “-in” and “-non”. In fact, many words can be added with this kind of structure. Let me show some examples.

(Show a form of the prefix “-in” and its examples)

T: Here we have a word “correct” meaning “right, not wrong”, which can be changed into “incorrect” meaning “wrong”. And it is the same with the word like “formal”, “active”, “dependent”. These words can all match the prefix “-in”.

(With the following forms, examples of “-im”, “-in” and “-non”)

T: Now, are you clear about what the prefixes are and how should them added to a root word? OK, would you like to do an immediate exercise? Turn to page 116. Look at exercise one in the vocabulary part. Have you finished this one, which is your homework of last period? Let’s check it.

(Check the answers)

T: Would you like to go on with the exercise two? Good, do it together! The blank in the first question should be filled with…? Yes, unknown will do. Then, number two.

(Finish all the ten questions)

IV) Homework

Do exercise 3, P117 in your workbook.

V) Design of the Blackboard

限制性定语从句 wing

非限制性定语从句 spirits

fashion: 时尚潮流 unfold

入乡随俗 informal

mix 否定词缀

Grammar

--Period Four

I. Teaching Aims and Demands.

(1) Know how to distinguish the Restrictive Attributive Clause and Non-Restrictive Attributive Clause and how to use a proper relative pronoun.

(2) Good manners around the world

II. Key and Difficult points

Grasp the two distinctions between the Restrictive Attributive Clause and Non-restrictive Attributive Clause

III. Teaching Methods

(1) Learning-practicing method

(2) Reading-acting method

IV. Teaching Aids

Multi-media courseware

V. Teaching Procedures

I) Checking exercise (translation)

In the first task, the teacher will check the homework of last period, i.e., exercise3 on P117, the translation exercise from Chinese to English. The answer will be provided on ppt.

T: first, we are to have our homework checked. Ok?

T: who can tell me the sentence in English of question one.

T: Excellent! And this sentence can be also translated in such a way:

“1 It was my fault that your new cell phone was stolen.” Then, the next one?

(Finish within seven minutes)

The answers for reference:

2 The old temple made a deep impression on me.

3 She has been fond of reading since childhood.

4 She had been an excellent gymnast before the accident, which disabled her.

5 More and more Westerners are becoming interested in Chinese culture.

II) Revision of the grammar in the past units (the Attributive Clause)

1) The teacher shows a sentence with Attributive Clause and also what the Attributive Clause, the antecedent, the relative pronoun and relative adverb are. Then he list out the relative pronouns and summarize when to use them.

2) List the relative adverbs and make sentences with them

3) We can change these relative adverbs into the prepositon+relative pronoun structure. Review the standards which are used to decide which preposition should be used here.

T: During the past weeks, we’ve learned the Attributive Clause, right?

T: Here is an example. The city that he visited is very far away.

Which part of it is the Attributive Clause?

T: And the Antecedent(先行词)? Where?

T: The Relative Pronoun(关系代词)？

S：

T：How many kinds of Relative Pronoun have we learned? What are they?

Ss:

T: Yes. They are that, which, who, whom, whose.

(Show another sentence)

T: In this sentence, we have a Relative Adverb in it, right?

T: Here, in fact, we can replace the Relative Adverb with the phrase of “preposition + Relative Pronoun” Remember that?

III) Restrictive & Non-restrictive Attributive Clause

1) it is the main task of this period. The teacher starts with asking students to find Attributive Clauses in the passage in Reading part.

2) Having found all the four sentences of this kind and analyzed the structure, then students are asked to compare the first two sentences and find out the differences between them in the sentence structure. With these differences, the teacher draws the conclusion to the two kinds of Attributive Clause.

3) The teacher now is going to show systematic the differences of them with a pair of sample sentences.

4) Give out notices for using the relative pronouns:

T: Today we are going to study mainly the Restrictive and Non-restrictive Attributive Clause. First, we shall find out all the Attributive Clauses in the Reading passage, will you?

(Do the job with all the class)

T: You can look at ppt. can find out any differences between the first one and the latter four?

T: We can compare first two only. So, any differences?

T: Yes, we can find no commas in sentence one and a comma in sentence two. Besides, they have another difference. The Attributive Clause in sentence one cannot be left out and that in sentence two can. Have you noticed that?

T: Good. For the sentence one, we call it a Restrictive Attributive Clause; while sentence two, a Non-restrictive Attributive Clause. We can see their differences from the form on ppt. the differences can be drawn in the four ways: sentence structures, meanings, ways of translation and the use of relatives. Look at this pair of sentences:

①The man who came here yesterday has come again.

②He lives in the down town, which is only about an hour’s ride from here.

(expound it with them)

T: Besides, we should also pay attention to the notices:

1.引导非限制性定语从句的关系代词不可用that，指人时用who(主), whom(宾语), 指物时须用which.

2.先行词是all，much，little，something，anything，nothing等不定代词时，关系代词一般用that．

3．先行词是序数词、形容词最高级或the only，the very修饰时，关系代词常用that．

IV) Practicing

1) Having learned the two kinds of Attributive Clause, it is time to consolidate the students’ understanding. Thus, the teacher guides them to do the exercise on P40 in the book. Due to the limitation of time, some of the questions may be put away first. This exercise demands students to add some information to the new clause after the relatives. The teacher should encourage students to make sentences freely.

2) In order to make it clear that the clauses are distinguished with the two standards: the existence of the comma between main clause and Attributive Clause; the independence of the meaning of the main clause, then, do a further exercise. A group of four sentences for the students to judge it is a restrictive or non-restrictive one:

3) Turn to P118, and do the exercise two. This exercise examines the students’ grasp of the use of relative pronoun in non-restrictive Attributive Clauses. After checking each answer, the sentences should be also translated into Chinese by students.

T: Shall we do some exercise to consolidate it?

T: Turn to page 40, add some information to make the following sentences longer, using who, whose, which, where, or where.

1 I finished reading the book which my father gave me for my birthday.

2 The car, which had been parked in front of our house for more than a week, was stolen.

3 Paula, whose husband lives in London, lives alone on the fourth floor.

4 My sister Ellen, whom you saw yesterday at the party, is a nurse.

(if time’s limited, four sentences only)

T: So, clear about the Restrictive and Non-restrictive Attributive Clause?

T: Can you judge them: Restrictive or Non-restrictive one?

(The sentences are :)

1. The teacher told me that Tom was the only person that I could depend on.

2. His mother, who loves him very much, is strict with him.

3. China is a country which has a long history.

4. China, which was founded in 1949, is becoming more and more powerful.

T: Now, if you’re still not sure about the use of Relative Pronoun, turn to page 118 to practice more.

T: Complete the sentences with who, whom or which. Look at sentences, which relative pronoun can we fill in the blank?

T: Good, we can fill in it with “whom”.

(Finish it one by one)

V) Integrating Skills (reading)

Here is another task: doing the Reading part in Integrating Skills in workbook on P118-119. This is a text talking about good manners all around the world. The teacher can quit the exercises in the book and create a method of efficient teaching to train the students’ ability. The following is one solution.

1) Fast reading and answering. Let them first have a fast reading with some given questions about the content of the passage, which can be easily answered. Then minutes later, check them. The questions are:

1 What are good manners about?

2 What is probably the worst thing during Chinese dinner?

3 Is it good for you to say something nice about your Arab friend’s pet dog? Why?

2) After this practice, students are more familiar with the context. Now they are asked to scan the passage to get the information about what do people in different countries and areas do in some given situations.

They should first find out the answers, and then some of them will be called to come to the blackboard and act the people’s actions in these situations. They can understand and have a deep impression on the text and related knowledge through the actions.

T: Well, we’ll go on with Integrating Skills. First, read quickly and answer:

1 What are good manners about?

2 What is probably the worst thing during Chinese dinner?

3 Is it good for you to say something nice about your Arab friend’s pet dog? Why?

(three minutes later)

T: Are you Ok? What are the answers. What are good manners about?

(ask one student to answer)

T: Just right! We can find the answer in the last sentence, paragraph one. Have you found that?

(Continue to find out answers to the nest two)

T: Now, shall we do sth. interesting with information of this passage?

T: Scan the passage to get the information about what do people in different countries do in the given situations:

1. When meeting people

2 When talking to people

3 In public, many north Europeans

4 When smoking, Indians

T: I’ll call some to act out the good manners in some place of the world.

(Two minutes)

T: Who knows “when meeting people, what will the Westerners do? And Americans?

T: Right, would you come here to act it out for us?

(Through this activity, Ss have chances to act and remember them)

VI) Homework

1. Do exercise 1, P118 in exercise book.

2. Question 5-8, p41,

VII) Design of the blackboard

Childhood 非限制性定语从句

When= at which 人（主） who

Where= in which 人（宾） whom

Why= for which 物 which

That ( x)

Leave out

Say sth. nice

Speaking & Integrating Skills

--Period Five

I. Teaching Aims and Demands.

(1) Learn to apologize and express thanks and response to them using related expressions

(2) Train students’ imagination and creativity in situation performances

(3) Improve the ability to debate (especially when supporting the opinion against one’s own interests )

(4) Learn to write a thank-you letter

II. Key and Difficult points

(1) Use given expressions to express apologies properly (formal or informal) in a certain situation

(2) Grasp the format of a thank-you letter, especially the content of each paragraph

III. Teaching Methods

(1) Group work

(2) Role-playing

(3) Read and write

IV. Teaching Aids

A ppt. courseware

V. Teaching Procedures

I) Speaking

In this part, there are three situations for making dialogues. In each of them, someone has done sth. wrong, and should apologies to others.

(1) Let students go over the texts of these three situations and imagine themselves are in it.

(2) After reading, the teacher told them in Chinese what the matter is in the situations. Explain some phrases if necessary.

(3) Then learn the expressions used for making apologies. The teacher should explain every one in the form at the bottom of the page and told them in what situations these can be used, especially whether they can be used in a formal or informal one.

(4) They can choose one of the situations to practicing dialogues. If they still wonder how to carry it out, show them a model dialogue on ppt.. Let students have a discussion with their partners and prepare to act out the dialogues.

(5) Ask pairs to act out them.

T: In the first period of this unit, we have learned how to apologize, if we do sth. Wrong. Do you still remember?

T: Today, we are going to have some talking practices about this knowledge point. First, go over the situations in Speaking part by yourself and imagine you are in it.

(Two minutes)

T: Do you understand what these texts say? Let me tell you.

(Explain the language points of this part)

T: Look at the expressions used for making apologies at the bottom of the page. You should use them carefully. Notice that some of them can be only use in formal occasions, and some informal. For example, “Forgive me. I’m very sorry.” and “I apologize for” are formal ones; while “oops. Sorry about that” is informal one. Well, next, I will show you how to carry out the dialogues.

(Show a dialogue of situation one on ppt)

T: So, who would like to have a try?

(One or two pair of Ss to act out the dialogues)

II) Talking

This part is on P116 in workbook. The teacher can choose only one situation.

(1)The teacher first explains the situation in Chinese what the topic is.

(2)Then let them have a discussion first to prepare for the Talking for about some minutes.

(3)The teacher divided the class into two parties (every two groups make one), and give the tow opposite opinions to them. They should argue for the opinion of their own party.

(4)Carry out the discussion

① The teacher asks one member of one party to present their opinion.

② With this opinion, the teacher asks the other party whether they agree. So, some in the party must defend themselves.

③ In this way, the tong war begins.

(The time should be controlled allowing the tasks of the period to be finished.)

T: Turn to page 116, and look at the first text in Talking part. We are going to have a debate with this topic. It is about whether women should “go first”, be offered helps, and taken care of, and whether that does good to women. Now discuss with your partner with the topic. Ok?

(Three minutes)

T: The two groups on this side support the opinion of “women should go first”, and the two on that side are against this opinion. Each of you should argue for your party. Understand?

(Have a debate)

III) Integrating skills (writing)

This task is aiming at teaching students to write thank-you letters and to train their reading ability (especially the ability to make summary to paragraphs).

i) To know the thank-you letter

(1) Read fast and answer the questions on ppt.. The answers can be found directly from the passage.

(2) Asks some students to give their main ideas of the paragraphs and show the right answers on ppt..

(3) Using the main idea, the teacher tells the students the format of the thank-you letter: every paragraph has its own purpose to write about. The format of the sample letter:

Paragraph 1: Give thanks to the people for what they did for us.

Paragraph 2: Tell the people something about ourselves and the things we’re doing now.

Paragraph 3: Ask the people for some details about themselves and what they are doing now.

Paragraph 4: Close the letter by repeating our thanks

This is the format for them to follow when writing a thank-letter.

ii) Learn another letter whose topic is chosen from the book: Thank a teacher for his/her help.

In this step, the teacher asks one student to read the first paragraph of this letter. And then, ask them to tell the main idea of every paragraph.

At last, the teacher repeats the format and steps of a thank-you letter, and is going to give them the writing work.

T: Let’s come to the last part of this unit: Integrating Skills. First, read it fast and answer the questions on ppt..

1 For what does Amy express her gratitude to Sam and Jenny ?

2 What is Amy sending them with this letter?

3 How is Amy getting along with her studies now?

4 What does Amy ask for in the third paragraph?

(four minutes later)

T: Have you finished? Who can tell me answer to question one?

(Check them one by one)

T: Well, are you clearer with this thank-you letter? Could tell me the main idea of each paragraph? In fact, writing a thank-you letter should always follow this format:

1 Give thanks to the people for what they did for us.

2 Tell the people something about ourselves and what we’re doing now.

3 Ask the people for some details about them and what they’re doing now.

4 Close the letter by repeating our thanks

T: Ok, let me show you another thank-you letter. Who would like to read the first paragraph?

T: Good. Thank you! Then, have you found that this letter is written in the form of the one on your book? So keep it in your mind what each paragraph of a thank-you letter talks about!

IV) Tips

The teacher guides the students going over the part Tips of this unit. Let them pay attention to these tips which are the supplement of this unit’s knowledge.

T: We’ll move to the Tips of this unit. Look at the phrase “keep in mind”, it means in Chinese“记住”. And “stare at”-- 盯着…看；“make jokes about sb.”-“拿某人当笑柄，取笑”.

(Then, the teacher goes over the tips with the class)

V) Homework

1 Choose one topic in exercise 2,p42, and write a Thank-you letter.

2 Summary(总结) what you’ve learned in this Unit.

VI) Design of the blackboard

introduce sb. to wish sb. all the best

Forgive me. I’m very sorry. keep in mind

I apologize for… formal stare at:

oops. Sorry about that informal make jokes about sb

篇9：学习手册Unit3 Going places(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

transportation,means,destination,postcard,adventure,adventurous,experience,get away

from,hiking,rafting,get close to,basic,equipment,backpack,tip,successful,sunscreen,watch out,spider,poisonous,protect,paddle,normal,handle,put…in danger,leather,similarity,benefit,

particular,effect,see…off,say“Hi”to Bob for me,combine,on the other hand,unpack,pick up

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

Where would you prefer going?

In which year would you like to go there?

Why would you like to go there…?

Do you think so?

When are you going off to…?

Is anybody seeing you off?

My plane leaves at seven.

Are you going anywhere for the holidays?

Well,I must be off.

Go skiing.

Go for walks.

Have a picnic.

Ⅲ.语法

学习现在进行时表示将来时及其他的用法

●学习障碍

Ⅰ.单词及短语

prefer,means,instead of,close,fun,successful,get away from,consider,watch out,protect,normal,

wear,put…in danger,similarity,benefit,effect,on the other hand,pick up

Ⅱ.语法

现在进行时表示将来时及其他用法。

●学习策略

Ⅰ.单词及短语部分

1.prefer v.宁愿，更喜欢

纵向归纳法:

（1）prefer + n./pron. The boy preferred a detective story.

（2）prefer + v.-ing Do you prefer living abroad?

（3）prefer +to do She prefers to live among the working people.

（4）prefer sb.to do sth. She preferred him to stay at home.

（5）prefer +n./pron./doing + to +n./pron./doing喜欢……而不喜欢

I prefer the town to the country.

While he was in the office he preferred doing something to doing nothing.

（6）prefer to do… rather than do 宁愿……而不愿

I prefer to walk there rather than go by bus.

（7) prefer + 从句(谓语动词用should do,should 可省略)

She preferred that he should do it in the kitchen.

横向比较法：

可以用would rather do…than do.转换prefer to do…rather than do…

I would rather walk there than go by bus.

击破定式法：

Rather than go with us,he preferred ________at home.

A.stay B.to stay

C.staying D.to staying

答案：B prefer to do… rather than do…短语变换顺序。

2.means n.手段，办法

纵向归纳法：

（1) by means of 用……,依靠……

The water may be carried by means of a pipe.

(2) by all means 一定，务必

Try by all/every means to persuade him to come.

(3) by no means 完全不是，一点也不，决不

This is by no means the first time you have been late.

综合运用法：

用所给词的适当形式填空

(1)Every means ________(have ) been tried.

(2) Such means ________ (be ) unpleasant.

答案：（1）has （2）are

means单复数同形，根据句意决定1.means是单数，2.means 是复数。3.instead of prep.代替，而不

纵向归纳法：

（1）instead of +n./pron.

Give me the red one instead of the green one.

（2）instead of + doing

We walked down the stairs instead of taking the elevator.

（3）instead of +介词短语

He studies in the evening instead of during the day.

横向比较法：

(1)instead adv.作为替代（……而），代替

If Harry is not well enough to go with you,take me instead.

(2)rather than而不是，与其…宁愿

The colour seems green rather than blue.

He ran rather than walked.

(3)in place of 代替，……而不用

The Chinese use chopsticks in place of knives and forks.

综合运用法：

We'll have the discussion in the garden ________the hall.

A.instead of B.instead in

C.instead of in D.instead

答案: C 综合运用instead of 与instead 的使用方法。

3.close

纵向归纳法：

(1)close [klus] adj.靠近，接近

The church is close to the shops.

亲密，密切 Are you a close friend of theirs?

周密，仔细 Keep a close watch on the children.

(2)close [klus] adv.靠近，接近He was standing close to door.

(3)close [kluz] v.关上，闭上 She closed her eyes.

关闭，（对外）不开放 The post office closes at half past six.

结束 Then he closed the interview.

At eleven the meeting closed.

(4)closely adv.紧密地

He got more closely in touch with the magazines of the day.

仔细地，密切地 The little baby was closely looked after by her.

横向比较法:

(1)close 与closely 作副词时，close 含具体之意，closely 含抽象之意。

(2)类似的词组有high（高）-highly（高度地），deep（深深地）-deeply（深入地），

wide （很开，宽）-widely（广泛地），low（低的）-lowly（低贱的）（作形容词）

击破定式法:

改错: The child sat there deeply in thought.

答案：把deeply 改为deep，deep in thought 是固定短语，“陷入沉思中”

5.fun n.高兴，乐趣，有趣的人或事

纵向归纳法:

（1）for fun 为了高兴，为着好玩 I only did it for fun.

（2）make fun of 开……的玩笑，取笑

It is wrong to make fun of a cripple.

横向比较法:

（1）laugh at 笑（某人），嘲笑

It's unkind to laugh at a person who is in trouble.

（2）play a joke on 开（某人的）玩笑

Let's play a joke on the teacher and lock the door so that she can't get in.

综合运用法:

________ fun we had!

A.What B.How

C.What a D.How a

答案：A 解此题应综合运用感叹句知识，fun 是不可数名词，而how 不能连接不可数名词。

6.successful adj.成功的，有成就的

The operation was quite successful.

纵向归纳法:

(1)success n.成功 She wished him success in his new shop.

成功的人或事 Jane was a great success in the play.

(2)succeed v. I did not succeed in my first lecture.

综合运用法:

Congratulations ________ your success ________ the book.It reminds me ________my childhood.

A.for；in；about B.on；in；for

C.for；about；of D.on；in；of

答案: D 解此题须综合运用congratulation 和remind的知识。succeed in sth.在某方面取得成功,congratulations on sb.祝贺某人，remind sb.of sth.使某人想起某事。

7.get away （from）

纵向归纳法:

(1)摆脱 With the small farm there is no getting away from poverty.

(2)走开，离开 The girls get away from work at five p.m.

She didn't get away until nine last night.

（3）逃走，使离开 The bank robbers used a stolen car to get away.

（4）拿走 Get all these party dishes away!

横向比较法:

(1）get out （of）躲避（做某事），避免（做某事）

You can't get out of paying your debts.

Several men got out yesterday.

(2)get off 下车，动身，寄出，下班

They got off (the bus) and walked away quickly.

get rid of 摆脱，除掉，处理掉

You must have a thorough rest and get rid of your sleeplessness and headaches.

联系语境法:

I really don't want to go to the party,but I don't see how I can ________ it.

A.get back from B.get out of

C.get away D.get off

答案：B 联系语境，我不知道怎样摆脱它。C.get away不能接宾语。

8.consider v.

纵向归纳法:

(1)考虑 consider + n./doing

I sat down by the fire to consider my question.

He considered going abroad.

(2) 认为consider + n.+ as +n./adj.オ

I do not consider Mary as my best friend.

consider +n.+to be+n./adj.オ

Most people considered to be innocent.

consider + n.+ n./adj.オ

They considered Paris the brain and heart of the country.

除了consider… as…表认为外，还有 regard…as…,look on… as…,take… as…,think of… as…

联系语境法：

-He failed his exam again.

-But what did you ________?Had he ever been working hard?

A.think B.expect C.consider D.regard

答案：B 表你还能期待什么？think,consider,regard表认为，consider 还表考虑，不符合语境。

9.watch out 当心，注意

You'll be cheated if you don't watch out.

Watch out! The police are coming.

纵向归纳法：

（1）watch out for 提防，当心

You must always watch out for the traffic here!

（2）watch for 留心找寻，小心等候

You had better wait and watch for a better chance.

（3）watch over 照看，看守，负责

The mother bird is watching over her young.

横向比较法：

（1）look out (for) 当心

Look out when you're crossing the road.

When you're eating fish,look out for bones.

（2）take care (of) 当心，注意

Take care of your head on that low ceiling.

（3）be careful 小心，当心，注意

It's all right,of course,but still we'll have to be careful.

联系语境法：

________! There's a train coming.

A.Look up B.Look out

C.Look around D.Look on

答案：B 小心，look up 查找,look on旁观

10.normal adj.正常的，正规的

the normal temperature

横向比较法：

（1)regular 规则的，有规律的

keep regular hours 生活有规律，按时作息

（2）common一般的，平常的 Tom is a common name in Britain.

共有的，公共的 become common knowledge 成为众所周知的事情

（3) usual 惯常的，惯例的

It's usual with him to go to the office on foot.

（4）ordinary平凡的，普通 in ordinary dress

联系语境法：

A person's ________ body temperature is about 37℃.

A.ordinary B.normal C.common D.usual

答案: B 联系语境，正常体温。

11.wear v.オ

纵向归纳法:

(1)穿着：He is wearing an overcoat today.

She wears red.

(2)戴：wear glasses

(3)蓄留着（须，发）：wear one's hair short

(4)（脸容等）呈现，显出：wear a happy smile

(5)磨损：The coat is much worn.

(6)wear away:（使）磨损，（使）磨灭：

The waterfall is wearing away the rock.

（印象、时间等）消逝，（人）衰退：The year is wearing away.

(7)wear out（把）穿破，（把）用坏: I have worn out my shoes.

（使）疲乏，（使）耗尽: My patience wore(was worn) out.

横向比较法:

(1)put on 侧重穿着的动作

Put on your sweater,otherwise you will feel cold.

(2)dress sb.(in sth.) 或be dressed (in sth.) 注意:穿的衣服接在in 之后。

Mother dressed her baby and then they went downstairs.

(3)have on 表示穿着的状态,注意不能用进行时。

At the spring festival,all children have on new clothes.

(4)be in 表示穿着的状态。

There was a girl in red.

The girl was in a coat.

(5)try on 试穿

Mother was trying on a new dress.

击破定式法:

Jack is ________ a black jacket today.

A.having on B.put on

C.wearing D.dressed

答案:C have on不能用在进行时中，put on 表示动作,本题表达的是今天的穿着,是状态,dress 不能直接接衣服。

12.put… in danger使…处于危险之中

Don't do it,or you will put yourself in danger.

纵向归纳法:

（1）in danger 在危险中

The flood is coming and all villagers are in danger.

（2）out of danger脱离危险

After the successful operation,the patient was out of danger.

（3）be in danger of有……的危险

The whole village was in danger of being flooded.

横向比较法:

（1）dangerous adj.危险的

That man was dangerous.意为那个人很危险,不要靠近。

（2）in danger

That man was in danger.意味着那个人的生命有危险.

13.benefit

纵向归纳法：

(1)n.利益,好处 That will be of benefit to you.

（2）vt.有益于 This medicine will benefit you.

（3）vi.受益 We benefit from daily exercises.

14.effect n.效果,作用 on sth.

His words had a great pushing effect on his students.

纵向归纳法：

（1）be of no effect 无效

（2）come into effect 开始生效，开始实行

横向比较法：

affect vt.影响 The climate affected the amount of the rainfall.

联系语境法：

The new law will come into ________ on the day it is passed.(上海)

A.effect B.use

C.service D.existence

答案: A come into use 开始被使用,come into existence开始存在,产生，成立，不符和语境。 15.on the other hand 另一方面，常用于on the one hand,…on the other hand 表示一方面，另一方面……

The boy likes to ask questions,on the other hand ,he does not like to listen to answers.

16.pick up

纵向归纳法：

（1）拾起,捡起 The monkey picked up the hat for the old man.

（2）(偶然地、无意地)获得,学会

When he was in Japan,he picked up some Japanese.

（3）(无线电)收听到,(依靠探照灯,雷达等)测知,看到

Using a short wave radio,you can pick up BBC and VOA.

（4）(车辆等)中途搭(人)

The train stopped to pick up some passengers.

（5）(使)恢复健康，振起精神

He is beginning to pick up.

横向比较法：

（1）pick 摘

Boys were busy helping farmers to pick apples.

（2）pick out 选出,拣出

Please pick out what you like best.

Ⅱ.语法部分

现在进行时的用法

纵向归纳法:

1.表示现在（说话的瞬间）正在进行或发生的动作。

Look! The monkey is climbing the banana tree.

2.表示当前一段时间内的活动或现阶段正在进行的动作。（说话时动作不一定正在进行。） We are preparing for the meeting to be held next Friday now.

3.表示说话人现在对主语的行为表示赞叹、惊讶、厌恶等。（常与always,constantly,continually,all the time,forever等副词连用），表反复的动作。

He is always thinking of others.(表赞许)

She is always asking the same question.(表厌恶)

You are always changing your mind.(表抱怨)

4.表示在最近计划或安排要进行的动作。常用于go,come,leave,start,arrive,return,work,

sleep,stay,do,have,wear等表移动，方向的动词。

He is starting the work in a few minutes.

He is leaving for Beijing tomorrow morning.

注意：

1.不用进行时的词有

（1）系动词：feel,sound,smell,taste,look,appear,seem,remain,prove等。

（2）表结果的感官动词：see,notice,hear等。

（3）非延续性的动词，此动作开始即是结束：enter,accept,receive等。

（4）表心理状态，存在状态，拥有的动词：love,like,hate,care,dislike,respect,prefer,know,

understand,forget,remember,believe,want,wish,hope,mind,agree,belong to,depend on,own,have等。

2.用进行时的特殊词有系动词get turn,grow,become,go,come,fall等表由一种状态转入另一种状态时，用进行时表示渐近。

Today,many rivers that were polluted are getting cleaner and cleaner.

横向比较法:

现在进行时表将来的用法与一般将来时的区别：

(1）现在进行时表近期的，事先已经计划安排好的

-How are you getting to the airport?

-By taxi.Bob is coming with me to the airport.

(2)will do和shall do 表客观将来

shall用于第一人称，will用于第一、二、三人称。

I will/shall finish middle school next month.

表有科学根据的预测。The weather report says it will rain tomorrow.

表客观必然。

Man will make mistakes.

(3)be going to 表现在打算在近期或将来要做某事。

I'm going to finish my homework tonight.

表根据已有迹象的预测。

It's so dark outside,I think it's going to rain.

be going to 不与come,go连用，用be coming,be going 形式。

Mary is coming here this evening.

注意：

表计划、安排、规定要做的事，用一般现在时表将来，如飞机、火车是按时刻表运行的，学校是按开学前计划好的日程来运行的。

Our plane leaves at 6:00 a.m.

●方法实践

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.I'll go to the railway station to ________you ________.

A.see；of B.take；off

C.see；off D.see；away

2.The visiting professor ________giving lectures to students ________ invited to meeting at times.

A.preferred；to being B.preferred to；rather than

C.preferred；than being D.preferred；to

3.No one can be sure ________ in a million years.

A.what man will look like B.what will man look like

C.what look will man like D.man will look like what

4.Please say “Hi” to Bob ________ me.

A.to B.for

C.about D.from

5.As soon as I ________the bus stop,the bus ________.

A.got；reach B.arrived；got

C.reached；arrived D.got；arrived

6.Let us ________ out for ________,________?

A.go；a drive；shall we B.go；drive；shall we

C.go；a drive；will you D.to go；drive；will you

7.David jumped ________to get the first ________ the beginning of the sports.

A.enough high；in B.enough highly；in

C.high enough；at D.highly enough；at

8.-Why does Ling Ling look so unhappy?

-She has ________ by her classmates.

A.laughed B.laughed at

C.been laughed D.been laughed at

9.Rather than ________ on a crowded bus,he always prefers ________ a bicycle.

A.ride；ride B.riding；ride

C.ride；to ride D.to ride；riding

10.The farmer taught the students how to ________ seeds.

A.elect B.select

C.look D.choose

11.I often ________ English programs with my radio.

A.accept B.listen to

C.pick out D.pick up

12.Tom is a naughty boy,and he likes to ________ others.

A.make fun B.make fun on

C.make fun of D.make funs of

13.The child ________ away from his father and ran out.

A.took B.broke

C.drove D.caught

14.His invention ________ useless by the scientists of that time.

A.considered being B.was considered being

C.considered to be D.was considered to be

15.It ________that the whole world pay attention to ________ wild life.

A.hopes；protect B.is hoped；protect

C.is hoped；protecting D.was hoped；protecting

16.She asked her daughter to ________the new dress.

A.be wearing B.try on

C.fit on D.dress in

17.He is a man of ________ and he had ________ interesting ________in his life.

A.much experience；a lot of；experiences

B.many experiences；much；experience

C.many experiences；much；experiences

D.much experiences；a lot of；experiences

18.The girl ________ is her sister.

A.dressing in red B.wearing red

C.dressed in red D.worn a red coat

19.I tried to ________ last night to tell you the good news,but no one answered the phone.

A.call you up B.call on you

C.call for you D.call you out

20.This is not a match.We're playing chess just for ________.

A.habit B.hobby

C.fun D.game

21.Every possible means ________ to prevent the air pollution,but the sky is still not clear.

A.is used B.are used

C.has been used D.have been used

22.A person's ________ body temperature is about 37℃.

A.ordinary B.normal

C.common D.usual

23.I really don't want to go to the party,but I don't see how I can ________ it.

A.get back from B.get out of

C.get away D.get off

24.Was it in 1969 ________ the American astronaut succeeded ________ landing on the moon? A.when；on B.that；on

C.when；in D.that；in

25.They ________ the train until it disappeared in the distance.

A.saw B.watched

C.noticed D.observed Ⅱ.阅读理解

My wife and I spent two weeks in London last year.We went there in the autumn.We think it is the best season to visit English.The weather is usually good and there aren't too many tourists in October.

We stayed in a small hotel in the West End.It was convenient as we did most of our sightseeing on foot.Taxis were too expensive,we couldn't understand the bus routes,and my wife didn't like traveling on the underground.She said it made her feel sick.

We went to look at the places which all tourists see.We saw Buckingham Palace and the National Gallery.We went shopping in Oxford Street and spend too much money.What we liked most,though,was going to the theatre.We don't have the chance to see such wonderful plays at home.A lot of people say English food is very bad.We didn't think so.It's true that most of the restaurants are French or Italian or Chinese,but we had some very good meals.

In fact,we enjoyed our holiday so much that we have already booked again for this year.We're going to take our umbrellas,though.I'm sure we'll need them sometimes.

1.The speaker and his wife got around in London ________.

A.by taxi B.by bus

C.on foot D.by car

2.They haven't been to________ during their stay in London.

A.Buckingham Palace B.Oxford Street

C.the National Gallery D.the British Museum

3.They could ________ in London that they can't do at home.

A.have some very good meals

B.go shopping

C.see some very good plays

D.do sightseeing

4.Which of the following is NOT true about the couple?

A.They thought English food was bad.

B.They will visit London again.

C.The couple saw a lot in London.

D.They didn't take their umbrellas last year.

5.Which of the following can be inferred from the passage?

A.The couple enjoyed themselves very much in London.

B.London is the best place to visit.

C.The couple saw a lot in London.

D.It often rains in London.

Ⅲ.短文改错

Besides Egyptians,people of Mexico also builded 1.________

pyramids.They didn't build the pyramid for tomb.They 2.________

were used to build a pyramid and then build a temple on 3.________

top of them.The pyramids of Mexico are not as high as 4.________

that of Egypt,but they are bigger.Each pyramid has a wide 5.________

stairway that go from the bottom to the top. 6.________

The biggest pyramid in Mexico is almost 2 000 year old. 7.________

Scientists think it spent 10 000 men more than ten years 8.________

to build.On top of it they built a temple to worship 9.________

the sun.The temple is no longer there and people call it 10.________

the pyramid of the sun.

Ⅳ.书面表达

假如你是学生会主席,请根据下列内容,用英语写一则关于春游的通知。(字数100左右)

参加者:高一高二年级的学生

活动内容: 1.9月20日去香山公园爬山

2.在山顶野餐

3.参观植物园

集合时间及地点: 1.早晨7:00集合,7:20开车

2.学校大门前

注意事项: 1.穿运动鞋

2.自带午餐和饮水

3.准时集合

4.参加者在本周四之前到学生会报名

生词:植物园the botanical garden,报名 to enter one's name

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习（现在进行时的用法及将来时）

1.The doctor will be free ________.

A.10 minutes later B.after 10 minutes

C.in 10 minutes D.10 minutes after

2.One more week,________ we will accomplish the task.

A.or B.so that

C.and D.if

3.Look at the clouds.It ________ .

A.rains B.is going to rain

C.was raining D.will rain

4.You may leave the classroom when you ________ writing.

A.will finish B.finished

C.have finished D.had finished

5.Let's get in the wheat before the sun ________.

A.will set B.was set

C.set D.sets

6.We will start as soon as our team leader ________.

A.comes B.will come

C.come D.is coming

7.Don't get off the bus until it ________.

A.has stopped B.stopped

C.will stop D.shall stop

8.Do you think Sam'll call his old teacher as soon as he ________ in town?

A.will be arrived B.is arrived

C.arrives D.will arrive

9.The new secretary is supposed to report to the manager as soon as she ________.

A.will arrive B.arrives

C.is going to arrive D.is arriving

10.The volleyball match will be put off if it ________.

A.will rain B.rains

C.rained D.is raining

11.If city noises ________ from increasing,people ________ shout to be heard even at the dinner table 20 years from now.

A.are not kept；will have to B.are not kept；have to

C.do not keep；will have to D.do not keep；have to

12.-Do you like the material?

-Yes,it ________ very soft.

A.is feeling B.felt

C.feels D.is felt

13.-Don't forget to come to my birthday party tomorrow.

- ________.

A.I don't B.I won't

C.I can't D.I haven't

14.-Is this raincoat yours?

-No,mine ________ there behind the door.

A.is hanging B.has hung

C.hangs D.hung

15.________ it with me and I'll see what I can do.

A.When left B.Leaving

C.If you leave D.Leave

16.The water will be further polluted unless some measures ________.

A.will be taken B.are taken

C.were taken D.be taken of

17.He'll be an astronaut by the time he ________ thirty.

A.is B.had been

C.will be D.is going to be

18.Hundreds of jobs ________ if the factory closes.

A.lose B.will be lost

C.are lost D.will lose

19.I've won a holiday for two to Florida.I ________ my mum.

A.am taking B.have taken

C.take D.will have taken

20.Selecting a mobile phone for personal use is no easy task because technology ________so rapidly.

A.is changing B.has changed

C.will have changed D.will change

参考答案

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.C see sb.off为……送行,take sb.off带领，把……带往。

2.A prefer doing to doing,或prefer to do… rather than do…,B项应是 prefer to do… rather than be invited.表示被动关系。

3.A 使用陈述句语序。

4.D say “Hi” to sb.from me.请代我向……问好。

5.C 表示“到达”时用get /reach/arrive ,其中，reach是及物动词，直接加地点，get是不及物动词，get + n.或get + adv.,arrive是不及物动词，可以单独使用，也可arrive + in+ 大地点,或arrive+ at+ 小地点，或arrive + adv.。

6.C 解此题须综合运用反意疑问句的知识，祈使句的反意疑问句为will you?,go out for a drive 为固定短语。祈使句Let us…和 Let's…的反意疑问句不同，Let us…,will you?Let's …,shall we?。

7.C 综合运用，enough的用法是 adj./adv.+ enough，或enough + n.，此题中 “跳得高”表示的是具体的高度，这时应用high,而不是highly(表示抽象意义)，另外，at the beginning of + n.，而in the beginning 一般不与of +n.连用。

8.D 她被嘲笑,短语是laugh at,且表示被动关系。

9.C 短语正常顺序是prefer to do… rather than do…。

10.B 选种子应是select seeds,select常指有目的地仔细认真地选择，elect选举，choose指在所提供的对象中选择。

11.D 我的收音机可接收英语节目。accept主动接受，listen to强调听的动作，pick out挑选。

12.C make fun of sb.固定词组，取笑某人。

13.B break away 是动词短语，脱离或断绝往来，break away from sb./sth.表同……脱离关系,take away拿走，drive away开车离开。

14.D 他的发明被认为是无用的，consider 在本题中是认为的意思，因此用法为consider sb./sth.to be/as …,变为被动语态，为be considered to be/as…,to be/as 可以省略。consider 表示考虑时，用法为 consider + n./doing。

15.C It is hoped that … 是固定句型，表人们希望，pay attention to是固定短语，表注意,to是介词，后接n./pron./doing.。

16.B 她让女儿试穿新裙子，try on表示试穿（衣服），dress 表示穿着时用be dressed in + 衣服，fit on表试穿时用fit + 衣服 + on sb.。

17.A experience表“经验”，是不可数名词，表“经历，体验”，是可数名词。

18.C 穿红衣的女孩是她的妹妹，wear不接颜色，看分词与被修饰的名词的关系，表示主动关系用现在分词，表示被动关系用过去分词，因此wear 应用wearing表示主动关系，而dress的用法是be dressed in …,故用过去分词。

19.A call sb.up给某人打电话，call for sb.来找某人，call sb.on拜访某人，call sb.out叫某人出来，请某人出来。

20.C 下象棋仅仅是为了乐趣，for fun 为了乐趣，是固定短语。

21.C 综合运用主谓一致的知识，此题中means由every决定，是单数名词，谓语动词也用单数。

22.B normal表正常的，ordinary表平凡的，大众的，common表普通的，常见的，或共有的，usual表通常的。

23.B 我不想去，但不知道怎么从中摆脱出来， get out of 摆脱，逃避，get back from从……回来，get away逃离，应使用get away from+n.,get off 下来，动身。

24.D 强调句型为It is/was+被强调部分+that+句子其他部分，本题强调时间状语in 1969,succeed in+n./doing 表在某方面取得成功。

25.B 目送火车离去，see强调看见的结果，notice注意到，observe观察。

Ⅱ.阅读理解

1.C 第二段写出。

2.D 第三段写出。

3.C 第三段 We don't have the chance to see such wonderful plays at home.

4.A 第三段最后一句but we had some very good meals.

5.D 最后一段可以推断出We're going to take our umbrellas.

Ⅲ.短文改错

1.builded→built

2.tomb→tombs

3.去掉were used to do表过去，而be used to do表被动。

4.them→it 指代pyramid

5.that→those 指代pyramids

6.go→goes

7.year→years

8.spent→took it takes/took sb.some time to do sth.指花费某人时间做某事。

9.build后加it

10.and→but

Ⅳ.书面表达

NOTICE

The students of Senior Grade One and Two will go to Xiangshan Park on September 20.We will climb up the hill and have a picnic on the top of it.After that,we will visit the famous botanical garden nearby.Please wear your sports shoes and bring lunch and some drinking water with you.

We will meet in front of our school gate at seven o'clock in the morning.The buses are going to leave at twenty past seven.So be sure to come on time.

Those who want to go should enter your names at the Student Union before Thursday.

The Student Union

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习

1.C 将来时的时间状语用法：in +时间段，after +时间点。

2.C 将来时的特殊句型：祈使句+and/or ,主句。此题中，数词+名词可作祈使句，联系语境，用and而不用or。

3.B 天上有云，表示有下雨的迹象，用be going to。

4.C 主句是将来时，时间状语从句或条件状语从句用现在时。本题中主句用情态动词may，表示将来。

5.D 祈使句表示将来。

6.A 另外come是瞬间动词，用进行时表示将要发生的动作。

7.A 8.C

9.B be supposed to do 应该做……,含将来意义。arrive是瞬间动词，用进行时表将要发生的动作。

10.B

11.A 根据时间状语20 years from now 从现在起后，表示将来，因此主句用将来时，条件句用现在时，noise噪音应该被阻止，用被动语态。

12.C feel表示状态的系动词，不用进行时，不用被动语态。

13.B 祈使句表将来。

14.A 表示正在挂着的状态，一般时表客观真理。

15.D and是连词，前后并列成分，结构相同，后是句子，前用leave开头的祈使句。

16.B

17.A by the time到……时，是时间状语从句。

18.B if引导的条件状语是现在时，主句应用将来时，且要表示被动关系。

19.A 联系语境，用进行时表将来。

20.A 联系语境，so rapidly决定现在仍然在变化中，has changed 完成时表动作已结束，与句意不符。

篇10：学习手册Unit12 Art and literature(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

adult,chance,shooting,fight,romantic,adventurous,end,dark,creature,believe,habit,be about to,

stupid,scare,comedy/tragedy,vacation,in trouble,come across,magical,born,logical,work,

announcement,necessary,event,series

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

Which film do you wan to see?

What's it about?

When is the film shown?

How much are the tickets?

It's not expensive.

Ⅲ.语法

复习定语从句。

●学习障碍

1.单词及短语

ending,in trouble,dark,come across,believe in,habit,if only,be about to…when,work,event

2.语法

定语从句。

●学习策略

单词及短语部分

1.in trouble

纵向归纳法：

（1）(be)in trouble 有烦事，有困难，出事

They are in great trouble.

(2)get sb.into trouble 给人找麻烦，使……陷入困境

(4)put sb.to the trouble of doing sth. 麻烦某人做……

He didn't want to put me to the trouble of meeting him at the airport.

(5)take trouble(to do sth.) 费事，费心

It was good of you to take trouble to do the job.

横向比较法：

（1）介词in引起的短语表示状态特征（作表语）。

in surprise,in tears,in cash（用现金）,in power（执政），in high spirits（情绪高昂），in danger,in a bad temper（坏脾气）,in silence,in prison,in sight（在视线之内）

（2）介词at引起的短语,表“处于……状态”。

at work/play（工作中/游戏中）,at table（用餐中）,at war（在战争中）,at sea（在海上）（3）介词on引起的短语也可表状态。

on duty,on business,on holiday=on vacation,on strike（罢工）,on show,on sale,on fire,on purpose（故意地）,on foot,on the contrary（相反地）,on the whole（总的来说）

突破定式法：

You can't imagine the trouble I had________his house.

A.to find B.found C.finding D.find

答案：C 此题是与定语从句一起考查学生的应用能力，在固定搭配“have trouble(in)doing”的基础上，变换了一下考法。

2.dark

纵向归纳法：

横向比较法：

darkness n. 夜色，暗处，黑夜，黑暗

He sat in the darkness for a while.

I couldn't see her face in the darkness.

联系情境法：

It was getting________when I felt my office.It was impossible for me to got home before________.

It was a ________night.There was no moon and I couldn't see the road in the________.

A.dark;darkness;dark;dark B.darkness;dark;dark;dark

C.dark;darkness;dark;darkness D.dark;dark;dark;darkness

答案：D

3.believe

纵向归纳法： (1)相信，认为

I believe your words/what you said/you.我相信你。

He is in/has the habit of rising early.

(2)get/fall into the habit of养成/染上……的习惯

Philip has got into the habit of sitting by his side.

(3)form/develop the habit of…形成……的习惯

(4)break away from/kick a habit 改掉一个习惯

横向比较法：

(1)habit通常指单个人的经常行为

He has a had habit of biting his nails.

（2）custom（习俗）一般指整个社会在一段长时间里的习惯行为

the custom of giving presents at Christmas.

(3)practice指商业或法律上的常规做法

It's now quite common practice for married women not to take their husband's second name.

综合运用法：

Social________are very different from country to country.

A.custom B.habit C.customs D.habits

答案：C

5.if only相当于I wish，但愿……，要是……就好了。（应用于虚拟语气中）

If only he had seen me!

If only I were ten years younger.（虚拟语气中be动词采用were的形式）

横向比较法：

only if（相当于so/as long as）只要……就……（表条件）

You will succeed sooner or later,only if you work hard.

6.be about to do sth.正要（即将）做某事(不与具体的将来时间连用)

He waited until she was about to leave.

横向比较法：

(1)be about to do sth.…when+从句，正要做……这时发生另一件事。

I was about to leave when the phone rang.

（2）be doing…when+从句，正在……忽然……

I was just coming along to see you when I ran into Wilson.

（3）be on the point of doing sth.…when…正要（去做某事）……忽然……

I was just on the point of going when you came in.

7.event n.

纵向归纳法：

（3）incident n.（偶发）事件：Today an incident happened on campus.

●方法实践

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.Last Sunday I________a copy of the English-Chinese dictionary in a second-hand bookstore. A.ran across B.ran after

C.ran out of D.ran up

2.-Will another fifty be enough?

-Just twenty will________.

A.work B.do

C.suit D.fit

3-How did you find him out?

-I________his name by chance（偶然）on a list.

A.came down B.came about

C.came up D.came across

4.-I've decided to spend the summer holidays travelling in Australia.

-OH,________!

A.if only I could go with you

B.what a good news it is

C.how happily I was to hear that

D.what exciting to hear the news

5.Every new________has the possibility of making or losing money.

A.event B.venture

C.adventure D.expectation

6.-The prison was________fire last night.

-Someone must have set fire________it.

A.on;with B.on;to

C.over;with D.over;to

7.How I wish every family________a large house with a beautiful garden!

A.has B.had

C.will have D.had had

8.I know that Bob is not much of a football player,but when it________to maths,he is among the top three in the class.

A.refers B.goes

C.comes D.concerns

9.Unfortunately(=Unluckily),when I dropped in,Professor Li________,so we only had time for a few words.

A.just left B.has just left

C.was just leaving D.had just left

10.-How did it________that all the flowers died?

-I had forgotten to water them.

A.come about B.come back

C.come down D.come from

11.Does the way you thought of________the water clean make any sense?

A.making B.to make

C.how to make D.having made

12.-I'm coming down town.

-Come on.________.

A.I'll give you a lift B.You are welcome

C.Don't do that D.Come with me

13.What way are you thinking of________rid of the flies?

A.to get B.getting

C.being got D.to be getting

14.You have made a few mistakes in your composition but________you have done well.

A.first of all B.on the whole

C.on the other hand D.generally speaking

15.The librarian promised to get the book for me________she could remember who last borrowed it.

A.if only B.in case(万一，以防)

C.ever since D.even if(即使……也)

16.Such good use has been________his spare time________his English has improved a lot.

A.made of;that B.made of;as

C.made in;that D.found in;as

17.We were just________calling you up________you came in.

A.about;when B.on the point of;while

C.on the point of;when D.on the point of;as

18.-Can I help you,sir?

-Yes.I bought this radio here yesterday,but it________.

A.didn't work B.won't work

C.can't work D.doesn't work

19.-Next week we'll have the final English exam.

-Yes?Then,every minute must be made full use________English.

A.of studying B.to study

C.of being studied D.of to study

20.He is much occupied with（忙于）________of state.

A.events B.incidents

C.affairs D.matters.

21.My mother is usually on ________duty in her office every________few days.

A.the;a B./;a

C./;/ D.a;/

22.The harder we study,the more question we think of________.

A.asking B.being asked

C.to ask D.asked

23.-You seem to show interest in cooking.

-What?________,I'm getting tired of it.

A.On the contrary B.To the contrary

C.On the other hand D.To the other hand

24.-How is it that you are late for class again?

-________.

A.By bus and then on foot B.Because I missed the bus

C.Yes,it's quite wrong D.It's far from school

25.-What are you going to do this afternoon?

-I'll probably go for a walk later on________it stays fire.

A.as far as B.so long as

C.even if D.as if

Ⅱ.完形填空

Do you know what kind of things the young people are reading?More and more 1 and parents have noticed another kind of pollution,which comes from the printed papers 2 on streets.

These printed things 3 newspapers but have hardly 4 to do with them,you can only find readin materials badly made up there-some are too strange for anyone to 5 ;others are frightening stories of something 6 .However,many of the young readers are getting interested in such 7 reading,which 8 them what they should pay for their breakfast and brings them nightmares(恶梦)and immoral(邪恶的)ideas in 9 .Homework was left 10 daily games lost.

These sellers shout on streets selling their papers well.The writers,publishers and printers, 11 they are,we never know,are 12 their ill-gotten money(黑钱）.

The sheep-disguised(伪装）wolf's story seems to have been forgotten.Why not 13 this kind of things?Yes, both the teachers and parents have asked each other for more strict control of the young readers.

14 ,the more you want to forbid it, the more they want to have a look at it. 15 you may even find out several children,driven by their curious natures, 16 one patched paper,which has travelled from hand to hand.

It really does 17 to our society.It has already formed a sort of moral pollution.The 18 teachers and parents need more powerful support in their protection of the young generation.At the same time the young 19 need more interesting and healthy books to help them 20 those ugly papers.

1. A.teachers B.writers

C.readers D.students

2. A.found B.sold

C.given D.sell

3. A.appear B.seem as

C.look like D.are

4. A.nothing B.anything

C.something D.everything

5. A.get B.find

C.believe D.know

6. A.too bad B.still worse

C.even better D.very good

7. A.poisonous B.wonderful

C.interesting D.useless

8. A.takes B.uses

C.costs D.pays

9. A.use B.turns

C.common D.return

10. A.undone B.unknown

C.much D.less

11.A.who B.what

C.whoever D.making

12. A.using B.making

C.spending D.losing

13. A.allow B.forbid

C.separate D.leave

14. A.Happily B.Luckily

C.Unfortunately D.Badly

15. A.Seldom B.Always

C.Hardly D.Sometimes

16. A.find B.share

C.get D.hold

17. A.harm B.good

C.favor D.wrong

18. A.worried B.puzzled

C.surprised D.excited

19. A.writers B.teachers

C.parents D.readers

20. A.throw B.keep away

C.break off D.get rid of

Ⅲ.短文改错

This is a small village in the east bank of the 1.________

Nile River in Egypt.Most of its buildings are made 2.________

from mud.As the village is rich in natural resources, 3.________

people are satisfying with their life.They always wear 4.________

smile on their faces.The village is praised as happy one. 5.________

Every year many foreigners come there to hold their 6.________

weddings.So the village was called the international 7.________

wedding village.On August 8,every year,hundred of 8.________

couples hold a collective wedding at here.They 9.________

regard the date for a sign of good luck. 10.________

Ⅳ.书面表达

阅读下面对话：

A:Can I have a single room for tonight please?

B:Sorry,Madam.All our rooms are fully occupied.

A:Is there another hotel around here?

B:Yes,just a few blocks away.

A:Could you find out for me whether it has any vacant（空的）rooms?

B:Yes,I'll call them.Well,you are luckly.I've got a room for you.

A:Could you tell me where the hotel is?

B:You turn left and walk four blocks down the street to the first traffic light.You'll see the sign,Smith Hotel.

请根据对话，用第一人称口吻写篇短文，内容包括：1.你想在旅馆租一个房间，但这家旅馆已客满；2.你请求服务员帮助你；3.旅馆服务员是如何帮助你解决困难的。

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习（定语从句）

1.“Who moved my cheese?”,________is a best-selling book,is written by Spencer Johnson. A.which B.that

C.it D.what

2.Beijing government puts more than 1700 million yuan to increase its green space this year,________doubles the money provided last year.

A.as B.while

C.that D.which

3.I lost my way in the complete darkness,and,________matters worse,it began to rain.

A.made B.having made

C.making D.to make

4.The most favourite room is the tidy study with a fireplace（壁炉），________we can watch TV and enjoy the nice scenery outside.

A.where B.when

C.that D.which

5.The British are not so familiar with different cultures and other ways of doing things,________is often the case in other countries.

A.as B.that

C.so D.it

6.Sometimes the earthquake is so violent（猛烈）that it can destroy（摧毁）the whole city,________happened in Tangshan,in 1976.

A.as B.that

C.where D.like 7.Another unmanned spacecraft “Shenzhou Ⅱ”,________China greets the 21st century,

marks new progress（进步）in the century's space program.

A.for which B.from which

C.in which D.with which

8.The passenger was very impolite to the conductor,________of course,made things even worse.

A.who B.whom

C.what D.which

9.-________was it________they discovered the entrance to the underground place?

-Totally by chance.

A.How;that B.What;that

C.When;when D.Where;that

10.After you have used the dictionary,please just put it back________it belongs.

A.where B.to which

C.what D.that

11.Was it in the village________we used to live in________the accident happened?

A.where;that B.which;that

C.that;where D.where;which

12.The artist________the judge gave a prize is the teacher________I have been taught painting for two years.

A.form whom;by whom B.to whom;who

C.from whom;who D.to whom;by whom

13.Is________three hours________the boy________family is poor to come to school on foot? A.it;that;whose B.it;when;that

C.it for;that it takes;whose D.it;that it takes;whose

14.Let's put off the picnic until next week,________the weather may be better.

A.as B.then

C.if D.when

15.The question came up at the meeting________we had enough money to do the research.

A.whether B.that

C.if D.when

16.Jenny,I shall not forget the wonderful days________we spent together before we left that country.

A.in which B.that

C.when D.on which

17.America was________was first called “India”by Columbus.

A.that B.where

C.what D.the place

18.Is there a shop around________I can get a pack of cigarettes?

A.which B.where

C.that D.what

19.Is it the letter that you got yesterday________makes you so sad?

A.which B.what

C.that D.when

20.Is this research centre________you visited the modern equipment last year?

A.when B.that

C.the one that D.the one where

参考答案

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.A run across=run into=come across“偶遇”。

2.B do这里指“行，足够，合适”。

3.D

4.A 此处表达遗憾之情，if only应用虚拟语气。

5.B venture指（商业上的）冒险投资，而adventure只指“冒险”。

6.B be on fire表状态，set sth. on fire=set fire to sth.“纵火”。

7.B with与if only一样从句应用虚拟语气，一般现在时用过去时表达，将来时用would/could+动词原形表达，过去时用过去完成时表达。

8.C come to这里是“谈到，涉及”的意思，refer to“查阅，指的是……”。

9.C be just doing sth.…when+从句。

10.A come about是“发生”的意思。

11.B think of a way to do sth.这里a way位于句首后面是定语从句。

12.A “搭顺风车”。

13.A

14.B on the whole“总的来说”，on the other hand“另一方面”，generally speaking“一般来说”。

15.A if only表“要是……该多好呀！”要用虚拟语气。

16.A “make good use of his spare time…”把good use提前用被动语态。

17.C be on the point of doing sth.(=be about to do sth.)…when+从句

18.D doesn't work 此处强调事实，现在的状态。

19.D

20.C affairs of state（国务）。

21.C on duty（值日），every few days（每隔几天）。

22.C we think of the more question to ask.

23.A on the contrary（相反地），to the contrary（意思相反的，完全不同的）。

24.A 疑问词how就暗示此题强调的是方式，应用方式状语。

25.B so/as long as=only if“只要……就”表条件。

Ⅱ.完形填空

1.A 依据下文可知。

2.B 3.C

4.B 由句意可知。

5.C 太离奇荒唐，令人难以置信。

6.B 与前文对比。

7.A 这种小报称为pollution自然是“有毒或有害的”。

8.C 9.D 10.A 11.C 12.B 13.B 14.C 15.D

16.B 指相互传阅。

17.A

18.A 老师和家长自然要担心。

19.D 20.D

Ⅲ.短文改错

1.in→on in表示“在……范围内”，而这里指村子在尼罗河畔，故应改为on。

2.√

3.from→of 表示“由……做成的”，看不出原材料用be made from,而看得出原材料则要用be made of。

4.satisfying→satisfied 现在分词作形容词，一般用来修饰事物，be satisfied with是固定词组，其主语一般是人。

5.happy前加a one 替代village，有形容词修饰，前面要加不定冠词。

6.there→here 这里用come比用go好。来这里，去那里，动作与方向应搭配一致。

7.was→is 上下文都是用现在时动词作一般的叙述，时态要取得一致。

8.hundred→hundreds hundred,thousand,million等词加s,后面才能跟“of…”短语；如这些词前面有数词，则不能加s,也不要of。

9.at去掉 here,there等副词前一般不能加介词，但from,here,over there等例外。

10.for→as regard…as意为“把……认为是”，是固定搭配。另一同义词组则为take…for。 Ⅳ.书面表达

Last week I went to the city on business.I went into a hotel and asked the servant whether I could have a single room for one night.

Unluckily all the rooms in the hotel were full.Then I asked the servant if there was another hotel nearby.She was very willing to help me.She called another hotel and found a room there.Then she told me to turn left and walk four blocks down the street and the hotel was right at the corner.I thanked her for her help.

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习

1.A 此题为非限制性定语从句。

2.D

3.D to make matters worse是插入语“更加糟糕的是”。

4.A 从句中缺少地点状语，先行词在从句中作地点状语。

5.A as is often the case as it often happens“情况常常如此！”

6.A 此题为非限制性定语从句，用which和as都可以。

7.D greet the 21st century with…故应用with which。

8.D 此题同样是非限制性定语从句，which代替前面一句话。

9.A 这是强调句的特殊疑问句形式。“It is/was+强调部分+that+其他”。

10.A Put the book where it was是地点状语从句，因where前没有表示地点的先行词，put the book on the desk where it was是定语从句。

11.B 此题是把定语从句和强调句结合起来考查学生的能力。

12.D the judge gave a prize to sb.,I have been taught by the teacher.

13.D “It is three hours that it takes the boy whose family…”。

14.D when引导的非限制性定语从句，先行词在从句中作时间状语。

15.A 此处为同位语从句。

16.B 先行词days在从句中作动词spent的宾语，故应用that或which或省略。

17.C 此题是表语从句，从句中缺主语，故用what。

18.B 此处around作后置定语，修饰shop与后面的从句无关。

19.C “that you got”为定语从句，后面的是强调句。

20.D 注意这种句型的用法。オ

篇11：学习手册Unit11 The sounds of the world(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

practise,turn,represent,spirit,heart,rhythm,contain,in ommon,beat,spread,variety,record,satisfy,

simple,sound,discover,characteristics,combine,pick,rock,style,similar,entertain,intelligence,with复合结构

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

Which piece of music do you like best?

Can you help me decide…?

That's a good idea.

I'm not sure.

How about a Rolling Stones CD?

Ⅲ.语法

复习被动语态的各种形式。

●学习障碍

Ⅰ.单词及短语

spirit,heart,contain,in common,beat,spread,variety,simple,satisfy,dance to,sound,discover,pick,

rock,similar,with复合结构

Ⅱ.语法

被动语态。

●学习策略

Ⅰ.单词及短语部分

1.heart n.

横向比较法：

（1）lose heart 灰心，丧气

Don't lose heart!

(2)lose one's heart to sb.倾心于，爱上

The boy lost his heart to the girl.

(3)heart and soul 全心全意

They serve people heart and soul.

2.rock

纵向归纳法：

3.spread v.

纵向归纳法：

联系语境法：

The story________that the princess would soon marry.

A.gets round B.spread

C.was spread D.is got round

答案：B spread 作“传播，传开”解时，是不及物动词，无被动语态，与get round同义。

4.variety n.

纵向归纳法：

综合运用法：

Everyone arrived late at the party for a________of reasons.

A.number B.lot

C.great deal D.variety

答案：D 每个人迟到的原因各不相同，而不是有多个原因，a great deal of修饰不可数名词。

5.simple adj.

纵向归纳法：

6.satisfy v.

纵向归纳法：

横向比较法：

类似的结构还有：to one's surprise 令……（非常）吃惊的是

to one's joy/delight 令……（非常）高兴

to one's disappointment 令……（非常）失望

7.sound 玽./n./adj./adv.

纵向归纳法：

(4)sound adv. 熟（睡）

The baby is sound asleep(=sleeping sou-ndly.)

(2)noise n.指音量大而难听的声音

Stop making so much noise!

Ⅱ.语法部分

被动语态。

英语中的大多数及物动词可以变成被动语态，但也有只用主动表被动的情况。

纵向归纳法：

1.be(well)worth doing “……值得做”

=be(well)worthy of being done

=be(well)worthy to be done

The book is(well)worth reading/worthy of being read/worthy to be read.

2.want/need/require+doing=want/need/require+to be done(某物需要……)

My clothes are so dirty that they need washing.(=to be washed)

3.be to blame（应受责备）

I'm to blame for not closing the door.

4.be to let（……出租）

The house is to let.

5.连系动词：（1）表感觉的有：be,appear(似乎),feel（感觉，摸起来），look（看起来）,prove（证明是）,taste,smell,sound.

(2)表变化：become,come,drop,fall,get,grow,run,turn.

（3）表依旧：continue,hold,keep,remain（保持）,stay等不用被动语态。

The flowers smell sweet.

His face turned red.

Please keep silent.

6.有些动词和短语动词不用被动语态：come about（发生）,occur（发生），happen（发生），take place（发生）,break out（爆发）,belong to（属于）,last（持续），give out（用光，精疲力竭），come out（出版，发芽），add up to（总计）,come true（实现），cost（花费）,come up（问题被提出）

The meeting lasted four hours.

Great changes have taken place in the 20th century.

7.及物动词作不及物动词用+副词［如：hardly（几乎不），easily,badly,nicely,well,smoothly（顺利地）］等时，采用主动表被动。常用此结构的动词有：lock（锁），open,read,sell,wash,wear,write,burn,drive等。

The pen writes well.

The door won't lock.

Wood burns easily.

The cloth wears long.

8.有些动词用被动表主动：如devote（致力于）,seat（坐），hide（藏）,station（驻扎）等。

He was devoted(=devoted himself)to scientific（科学的）research.

He is seated(=seats himself)in the bench（长凳）.

The boy is hidden behind the door.

The soldiers are stationed at the foot of the mountain.

9.使役动词let,have,make,get的用法

I'll get him to make me a bookshelf.

综合运用法：

Who do you think the teacher has________the composition?

A.written B.write

C.writing D.to write

答案：B 句型have sb.do sth.对宾语sb.进行提问。

●方法实践

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.-How can I run a mile in such a short time?

-I think it possible,for the________runner can run 2 miles in fifteen minutes.

A.extraordinary B.usual

C.average D.general

2.Today CCTV offers a great________of programmes to meet the different needs and________.

A.variety;tastes B.many;interests

C.deal;likes D.number;habits

3.After moving into the town,my wife did some washing for the rich so that we had just enough to________our expenses（开销，开支）.

A.serve B.support

C.satisfy D.cover

4.-Mike,the phone is ringing.Do you want me to go?

-No,sit still.________.

A.I'm about to get it B.I'm getting it

C.I'd like to get it D.I'm to get it

5.-I didn't know this was a one-way street,officer.

-________.

A.That's all right B.I don't believe you

C.How dare you say that D.Sorry,but that's no excuse

6.Free medical treatment in this country covers sickness of mind as well as________sickness. A.normal B.average

C.regular D.ordinary

7.________the lights off,we could not go on with the work.

A.Until B.As

C.With D.Because

8.It's quite strange that the man sleep with his mouth________and his eyes________.

A.closed;open B.closed;opened

C.closing;open D.closing;opening

9.In the botanic garden（植物园）we can find a(n)________of plants that range from tall trees to small flowers.

A.species(物种) B.group

C.amount D.variety

10.I heard a soft________at the door.When I looked up.I fond it was Mary.

A.noice B.sound

C.voice D.cry

11.This dance is known________country music.

A.performed by B.to be performed with

C.to be performed to D.being performed in

12.He didn't go into details on the subject.He spoke________.

A.in common B.in particular

C.in general D.on short

13.The gas tank________twenty gallons（加仑）of gas,but now it may________only three gallons.

A.holds;contain B.holds;be contained

C.is held;contain D.is held;be contained

14.What he has done is far from________.

A.satisfactory B.satisfied

C.satisfaction D.satisfy

15.Nick is looking for another job because he feels that nothing he does________his boss.

A.serves B.satisfies

C.promises（答应，允诺） D.supports

16.-How about this kind of fruit?

-Oh,this kind of fruit________lots of vitamine C and B.

A.remains B.includes

C.contains D.holds

17.-He seldom has lunch at school,________?

-________.

A.does he;No,but he did B.does he;No,he hasn't

C.has he;Yes,he has D.hasn't he;Yes,he doesn't

18.Please tell me________you would like to have your coffee________black or white?

A.what B.where

C.when D.how

19.Xiao Wang finished his study in Beijing and has gone to Japan,________.

A.So has Xiao Li B.So it is with Xiao Li

C.So Xiao Li has D.So it has with Xiao Li

20.-I'd rather rest for a while.I am tired.

-________.

A.So I would B.Neither did I

C.So would I D.So did I

21.-It was careless of you to have left your clothes outside all night.

-My God!________.

A.So did I B.So I did

C.So were you D.So did you

22.I'm surprised that you should have been fooled by such a(n)________trick（诡计）.

A.ordinary B.easy

C.smart D.simple

23.As soon as those people________,they couldn't wait to change the law.

A.came to the power B.came into power

C.came into strength D.came to the strength

24.I tried every________to make him give up smoking,but I failed.

A.means B.mean

C.ways D.way

25.How happy they are!Obviously（显然）,they are________.

A.in nice spirits B.in nice spirit

C.in high spirits D.in high spirit

Ⅱ.阅读理解

In our country,power plants that make electricity are often built on rivers.Cool water that is used in making electricity becomes warm as it runs through the plant.Then the heated water is returned to the river.

When large amounts of warm water are dumped into a river,the river itself is heated.The temperature of the water may be raised only a few degrees.Yet these few degrees can change the animal and plant life in the river.Heat causes a loss of oxygen in the water.Fish no longer do well,and some kinds die.Without enough oxygen,bacteria in the river can not break down waste matter.The river is no longer clean.

In the coming years,new power plants will be built.Many will be run by nuclear energy.A nuclear power plant heats a river even more than a power plant run by gas,oil,or coal.

In some states,laws are being passed to protect the rivers.Certain rivers will be called “cold-water rivers”.Power plants will not be allowed to raise their temperature above 68°F.The temperature of “warm-water rivers”will not be raised above 83°F.Power plants will have to cool the water they pour into rivers.

1.Water is used in making electricity________.

A.flows fast B.is used up

C.becomes warm D.turns to ice

2.The story does not say so,but it makes you think that________.

A.fish must have oxygen

B.bacteria must be removed from rivers

C.plants need warm water

D.all the power plants are built on rivers

3.Many power plants will be run by________.

A.cold-water rivers B.nuclear energy

C.gas,coal,or oil D.drops of water

4.Why are laws being passed to protect our rivers?

A.We must save all the water we can to make electricity.

B.People are catching too many fish in our streams and rivers.

C.Without laws,warm water dumped into rivers could kill the fish.

D.Lawyers can have many jobs to do.

5.On the whole this story is about________.

A.the changes caused by heating rivers

B.how unclear power plants use electricity

C.why we must build new power plants

D.where we can find dead dish

Ⅲ.短文改错

When you buy stamp,you also buy service 1.________

from the post office.You get the letter send by 2.________

post.After the stamp has done its job,the post office

say it's worthless.You must buy a new one 3.________

for another letter you send it.But people 4.________

often pay money to stamps that have 5.________

already used.Stamp collectors have fun just trying to 6.________

collect so many different kinds as possible 7.________

certain kinds are hard to find.To get one of 8.________

uncommon stamps,some collectors are willing to cost 9.________

a great deal money.They think it is worth something and 10.________

that gives it value.

Ⅳ.书面表达

假如有一英国教师代表团来你校参观，你作为学生代表向他们介绍你们在校学习的情况，内容要点如下：

1.全校有38个班；1800名学生，200多名教师；

2.每天上午7：30上学；下午4：45放学；

3.上午有五节课，下午三节课，课程有：语文、数学、英语、物理、化学、生物、历史、地理、体育等。

4.字数：80~100

开头已给出，不计入总词数。

Welcome to our school,my dear friends.

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习（被动语态）

1.Do let your mother know the truth.She appears________everything.

A.to tell B.to be told

C.to be telling D.to have been told

2.Visitors________not to touch the exhibits（展品）.

A.will request B.request

C.are requesting D.are requested

3.Mr.Lopes was much disappointed（失望）to find the bike he had had________went wrong again.

A.it repaired B.repaired

C.repaired it D.to be repaired

4.-Why did you come by taxi?

-My bike broke down last night and I ________it repaired.

A.didn't have B.don't have

C.won't have D.haven't had

5.Your clothes need________.________she wash them for you?

A.to be washed;Shall B.to wash;Shall

C.washing;Will D.being washed;Will

6.This kind of cloth________well.

A.wash B.is washed

C.washes D.washing

7.-What do you think of the speech?

-The speaker said almost nothing worth________.

A.listening B.being listened to

C.listening to D.being listening

8.Bob,quickly get this film________.I want to know if this camera works well.

A.washed B.developed

C.printed D.shown

9.He firmly asked________a chance to try his luck,which at once encouraged（鼓励）________.

A.to give;the others four B.to be given;the other four

C.be given;four the other D.giving;the four others

10.-I'd like a pen which ________well.

-Will this one________?

A.writes;do B.writes;work

C.is written;do D.is written;work

11.To my disappointment,the computer I had________was out of order again.

A.repaired B.repaired it

C.had repaired it D.had repaired

12.He________when the bus came to a sudden（突然）stop.

A.was almost hurt B.was to hurt himself

C.was hurt himself D.was hurting himself

13.The Bunsen Burner is so named because it is thought________by Robert Bunsen.

A.to be invented B.having been invented

C.invented D.to have been invented

14.I don't care if a hunting dog smells________,but we really don't want him to smell________.

A.well;well B.bad;bad

C.well;badly D.badly;bad

15.All the preparations（准备）for the project________,and we're ready to start.

A.completed（完成） B.had been completed

C.complete D.have been completed

16.-I________to a party,but I've got nothing to wear.

-Why don't you have a dress made for the party?

A.was asked B.will ask

C.have asked D.have been asked

17.Your room requires________.________she clean it for you?

A.cleaning;Will B.to clean;Should

C.to be cleaned;Shall D.being cleaned;Will

18.I feel it is your husband who________for the spoiled child.

A.is to blame B.is going to blame

C.is to be blamed D.should blame

19.-What's the matter?

-The shoes don't fit properly.They________my feet.

A.are hurt B.will hurt

C.have hurt D.are hurting

20.This kind of cloth________well and________long.

A.is washed;lasts B.washes;lasts

C.washes;is lasted D.is washed;lasted

参考答案

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.C 表“一般的，平均的”，故排除A，usual表通常的状况。

2.A many后不用of，a great deal of 修饰不可数名词，满足人的需求与品味而不是习惯。

3.C 此处satisfy作“满足（需求、欲望等）”

4.B 表达临时的决定应用I'll get it,此题中be getting 也可表将来。

5.D 情景交际，这是司机与警察的对话。

6.D 常见病可以用common或ordinary。

7.C 此处为with的复合结构，要用as或became，必须是一个完整的句子，应说as the lights were off。

8.A with复合结构。

9.D amount修饰不可数名词，此题强调植物的种类不同。

10.C soft修饰人声。

11.C dance to country music表示随着乐律跳舞。dance with sb.“与某人跳舞”。

12.C in general表示“言简意赅”地说了些话。

13.A 此题中应用主动语态。

14.A to one's satisfaction “令人满意的是”，作状语，satisfactory (adj.)表“令人满意的”，作表语。

15.B

16.C contain表“包含（某种维生素）”。

17.A seldom（不常）故反意疑问句需用肯定式，此题中的has lunch是一般现在时，而but he did表过去“经常在学校吃饭！”

18.D 这里指咖啡的制作方式，而不是提供选择。

19.B 在谓语或时态不一致的情况下，一律用so it is with sb.（某人也是如此）。

20.C “so+助动词+主语”表示“某人也是如此”-

21.B so+主语+助动词表示“某人确实如此”。

22.D “simple trick”（简单的计谋）。

23.B come into power （上台、执政、掌权）。

24.A 具体的方法应用means。

25.C in high/low spirits“情绪高昂/低落”。

Ⅱ.阅读理解

1.C 根据文中第一自然段第二句话“Cool water that is used in making electricity becomes warm as it runs through the plant.”可确定C为正确答案。

2.A 根据文中第二自然段第四句话“Heat causes a loss of oxygen in the water.Fish no longer do well,and some kinds die.”可确定A为正确答案。

3.B 根据文中第三自然段第一、二句可确定B为正确答案。“In the coming years,new power plants will be built.Many will be run by nuclear energy”。

4.C 根据文中最后自然段第一句话可知“In some states,laws are being passed to protect the rivers.”

5.A 该题应统篇考虑得知A为正确答案。

Ⅲ.短文改错

1.buy后加a或stamp→stamps

2.send→sent 此处“send”表示的动作与“the letter”之间是被动关系，故须用过去分词sent。

3.say→says 句中主语“the post office”应视作单数。

4.删去it 该句中“you send”是定语从句，其宾语是前面省略了的关系代词which（或that），故此处it是多余的。

5.to→for pay作“付款”解时，通常与for连用。

6.already后加been 句中that引导的是定语从句。根据句意，从句中应用现在完成时的被动语态， been不可缺少。

7.so→as “as…as possible”是固定结构，表示“尽可能……的”。

8.√

9.cost→pay/spend cost用作动词，作“花费”讲时，其主语一般是“物”，而不是“人”。本句主语是“人”。根据句意，应将其改为pay或spend。

10.deal后加of 词组a great/good deal of意为“大量的”。其后一般跟不可数名词。

Ⅳ.书面表达

Welcome to our school,my dear friends.Now I am very pleased to tell you something about our school.

There are about 1 800 students in our school,studying in 38 classes.There are also over 200 teachers in it,too.We come to school at 7:30 in the morning and go back home at 4:45 in the afternoon.At school,we study Chinese,maths,English,physics,chemistry,biology,history,geography,

physical education and so on.We study very hard and we love our school very much.Thanks.

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习1.D appear与seem用法相同，不定式后面可用各种形式，此处表“妈妈已被告知这件

事了”。

2.D “参观者被要求……”。

3.B 此处用句型“have sth.done”，其中sth.被提前，后面又用了一个定语从句，而且是过去完成时。

4.D 指现在的状态。

5.A 主+need/want/require与后面的动词构成被动关系应用doing或to be done,shall用于一、三人称表示“征询意见”。

6.C

7.C be worth doing.“某事值得一做”。

8.B get sth.done，冲洗胶卷应用“develop”，不用wash。

9.B 要求别人给他一次机会，故应用被动。

10.A do表示“行，可用”，work表示“（计划、建议）有效，起作用”。

11.D

12.A 人受伤应用be hurt表状态。

13.D 已经发明完的东西应用完成时态。

14.D 此题用了smell的两个词性smell badly（实义动词）表示“味道不好闻”，而smell bad（联系动词）表示“嗅觉不好”。

15.D 由“We are ready…”判断应用现在完成时。

16.D 由后半句判断，也应用现在完成时。

17.C

18.A be to blame用主动表被动。

19.D “鞋挤脚”表现在的状况。

20.B

篇12：学习手册Unit7 Cultural relics(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

、●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

relics,protect,select,represent,suggest,proud,event,as,include,destroy,attack,give in,living,in ruins,lie,in pieces,hide,bring…back to life,with the help (of),missing,replace,recreate,once again,solve,come true,damage,limited

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

What/How about…？Why not…？

Why don't you…? Can't we…?

Let's … Maybe we could…

Ⅲ.语法

学习现在完成时被动时态。

●学习障碍

Ⅰ.单词及短语

proud,include,suggest,living,destroy,give in,lie,hide,missing,replace,solve

Ⅱ.语法

现在完成时被动语态。

●学习策略

Ⅰ.单词及短语部分

1.proud adj.

纵向归纳法：

(1)proud 骄傲、自豪

I'm proud to be your friend.

(2)proudly adv.

She looked at them proudly.

(3)pride n.

Pride goes before a fall.［谚］

(4)take (a) pride in sth.

He takes great pride in his work.

联系语境法：

She's proud ________ what you've done.

A.in B.of

答案：B 固定搭配be proud of sb./sth.。

2.include vt.

纵向归纳法：

(1)include v. 包括，包含

The plan includes most of my suggestions.

(2)including 介词

Everyone here has a book including myself.

(3)included

Everyone laughed,me included.

横向比较法：

contain vt. 里面（装有），包含，含有

The paper parcel(包裹) contained a clean shirt,socks and a hankerchief.

联系语境法：

用include或contain的适当形式填空：

(1)It's a book ________ 26 separate stories.

(2)At least 80 persons were injured,________ 5 policemen.

(3)They will send you the book for $2.75,postage（邮资）________.

答案：(1)containing。“一本有26个故事的书”，include接部分，contain可接全部，“26个故事”是全部。（2）including (3)included。“邮资”在“include”之前，postage与include是被动关系。

3.suggest vt.

纵向归纳法：

(1)suggest 建议

I suggest bringing the meeting to an end.

I suggested that we(should) have lunch now.

(2)suggest 暗示

The white look on his face suggested fear. (3)suggestion n. 建议［可数］轻微的迹象

I have a suggestion to make.

There was a suggestion of anger in his voice.

横向比较法：

suggest (sb.) doing

advise doing

advise sb. to do

advice n. ［不可数］

a piece of advice

联系语境法：

His attitude suggests that he ________ really interested.

A shouldn't be B.isn't

答案：B suggest这里不表示建议，所以从句不用(should)do。suggest表暗示，接从句时，从句时态人称按正常变化。

4.destroy vt.

纵向归纳法：

(1)destroy 摧毁，损毁

The forest was destroyed by fire.

(2) destruction 毁坏/灭 n.

横向比较法：

(1)damage n.&v. 损坏，损害

When she sees the damage that you've done she'll be angry.

Mind you don't damage it.

(2)ruin vt. 毁坏/掉；使倾家荡产

The storm ruined the crops.

If we should fail in this,we are ruined.

n. 毁坏，破产

Drink led to his ruin.

(be) in ruins 是一片废墟，落空

The building is in ruins.

Our plans are in ruins.

联系语境法：

用destroy,damage或ruin的适当形式填空：

(1)I was ________ by that law case;I'm a ________ man!

(2)She feared that the rain would ________ her new shoes.

(3)The ________ of the railway was a big loss to the country.

答案：(1)ruined,ruined (2)damage或ruin,表示“损坏，弄坏”。 (3)destruction damage和ruin表示的受损程度比destruction轻。

5.give in (to sb./sth.) （向……）屈服，让步

They never give in the enemy.

横向比较法：

(1)give up 放弃

She didn't give up her job when she got married.

(2)give away 赠送；泄露（机密）

She gave away most of his money to the poor.

Please don't give my secret away.

（3）give off 发出（气味、热）

This fire doesn't seem to be giving off much heat.

(4)give out 分发；宣布；被用完

The teacher gave out the exam papers.

He gave out that he was going to England.

The supplies are beginning to give out.

联系语境法：

(1)He ________ to the wish of other people.

(2)He pretended to be French,but his German accent ________ him ________.

A.give in B.give up C.give away

答案：(1)A (2)C

6.lie vi.

纵向归纳法：

(1)lie平躺/放

I lay awake fro about 10 minutes.

His hat was lying on the table.

(2)位于

The city lies to the north of the city.

横向比较法：

lie lay lain lying vi.

lay laid laid laying vt.放（置），下蛋

lie lied lied lying 说谎

联系语境法：

用lie,lay的正确形式填空：

(1)He ________ about his reasons for being late.

(2)Four or five miles to the east of them ________ the blue waters of Lake Michigan.

(3)They ________ me down on the bed.

答案：（1）lied (2)lay 表示“位于”，用lie的过去式。（3）laid 及物动词lay的过去式。

7.hide v.

(1)hide 躲，藏

Where are you hiding?

I hid the gift under the bed.

(2)（be）hidden 作表语或宾语补足语表状态

The boy was hidden behind the door.

I found the boy hidden behind the door.

击破定式法：

The sun was ________ by the clouds.

A.hiding B.hidden

答案：B 此题表示太阳被云遮住，表状态用be hidden。

8.missing adj.丢失

Is there anything missing?

横向比较法：

有些动词的-ing分词与另一些动词的-ed分词同义：

missing=lost

sitting=seated

wearing=dressed in

击破定式法：

Our teacher stayed ________ so long that he felt very tired.

A.sit B.to sit

C.seated D.seating

答案：C 此题stay seated表示“保持坐着”的状态。

9.replace v.

纵向归纳法：

(1)replace 代替

John is ill and has been replaced in our team by Tom.

(2)replace 放回原处，归还

All books must be replaced on the shelves.

You must replace the stolen money.

横向比较法：

take one's place 代替（职务或工作），接替；入座，取得地位

Shall we take our places at the table?

The new work will take its place among the most important paintings of this century.

联系语境法：

________,please.We are about to start.

A.Take your places B.Take place

C.Take your place D.Replace

答案：A 表示“入座”。C选项表示“代替你”或“请你入座”，人称数不符合题意。

10.solve vt.

纵向归纳法：

(1)solve 解决（问题，困难）；猜（谜）

He finally solved the difficulty.

The clever boy solved the riddle quickly.

(2)solution n. 解决（办法），答案

There seems to be no solution to the problem.

横向比较法：

(1)settle v.解决，处理，决定

I hope the boys settle their quarrel and become friends.

(2)定居

He settled in Canada after his retirement.

(3)settle down 安定下来

After years of travelling,he decided to settle down.

联系语境法：

It's not ________ whether I'm going to America.

A.settled B.solved

答案：A settle表示“解决”时，通常接表示“不同、争论”之类的词，如disagreement等。此处表“决定”。

Ⅱ.语法部分

现在完成时被动语态的用法：

纵向归纳法：

(1)结构：have/has been done

I have told him.→He has been told.

She has given him the book.→He has been given the book.

→The book has been given to him.

She has named the dog Lucy.→The dog has been named Lucy.

(2)短语动词应看作一个整体不能分开。

I have taken care of the child.→The child has been taken care of (by me).

He hasn't paid attention to what I said.→What I said hasn't been paid attention to (by him).

横向比较法：

现在完成时被动语态要注意以下几点：

(1)用法：

表示过去发生或已经完成的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果。

表示过去已经开始，持续到现在的动作或状态。可以和表示从过去某一时刻延续到现在（包括“现在”在内）的一段时间的状语连用：now,just,today,this morning,this month,this year,for,since,all the time和already,never,every,just,before,lately,recently,yet,so far,up to the present,up till now,in the past/last few years等状语连用。

常与有介词for,during,in within,over引导的时间状语连用，表示从过去的某一行为一直延续到现在。

We have discussed the topic (for) the last 3 weeks.→The topic has been discussed (for) the last 3 weeks.

在“最高级+名词”或在“这是第几次”之后跟定语从句，从句中用现在完成时。

用在时间、条件状语从句中，表示从句动作先于主语动作之前业已完成。

(2)与其他时态的比较：

①现在完成时：表示过去发生的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果，强调的是现在的情况。

一般过去时：只单纯表示过去的动作或状态，和现在不发生关系。

②现在完成时：强调结果或动作已经完成。

现在完成进行时：强调动作或动作在继续。

③现在完成时：动作过去发生，对现在有影响。

过去完成时：动作的发生在过去，结束也在过去。

(3)固定句型

①by短语

②It is the+序数词+时间+定语从句用现在完成时

It was the+序数词+时间+定语从句用过去完成时

●方法实践

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.-Whose advice do you think I should take?

-________.

A.You speak B.That's it

C.It's up to you D.You got it

2.In Switzerland,six miles west of Geneva,________ a collection of laboratory buildings.

A.lie B.are lying

C.lies D.lays

3.What a pity!He ________ the only chance of success.

A.threw away B.put down

C.gave in D.broke off

4.-What do you think of the manager of your company?

-Oh,he is ________ manager who is pleasant to work with.It's ________ pleasure to work with him.

A.the;the B.a;a

C.a;the D.the;/

5.To celebrate the winning of China's successful bid for the Olympic Games,Beijing city held an outdoor ________,which attracted a crowd of million people.

A.case B.action

C.affair D.event

6.With a lot of problems ________,the principal decided to hold a meeting to have a thorough discussion about them.

A.to solve B.being solved

C.solving D.solved

7.-Don't look down upon John.He has his own advantages.

-Oh,yes.________ others are weak,he is strong.

A.If B.When

C.Though D.Where

8.-Why not join us in the game?

-________.

A.Sure,please do B.No,you do the same

C.Oh,that's all right D.OK,coming

9.Compared with Jack,Tom was always ________ well and neatly.

A.dressed B.wearing

C.dressing D.putting on

10.His tired face suggested that he ________ really tired after the long walk.

A.had been B.was

C.be D.should be

11.My suggestion is that a few more people ________ there to help me.

A.be sent B.have sent

C.sent D.should send

12.Shortly after we ________,a waiter came over to our table with a smile.

A.seated B.were seated

C.sat ourselves D.took places

13.Have a good rest,you need to ________ your energy for the tennis match this afternoon.

A.leave B.save

C.hold D.get

14.-Are all telephone numbers ________ in the directory?

-Yes,all ________ Jane's.

A.listed;included B.listing;includes

C.listed;including D.being listed;being included

15.-How about this kind of fruit?

-Oh,this kind of fruit ________ lots of vitamine C and B.

A.remains B.includes

C.contains D.holds

16.The simple joy of reading is something we take for granted.But many people have had to ________ this pleasure because of poor eyesight.

A.give in B.give off

C.give out D.give up

17.The ________ boy was last seen ________ near the East Lake.

A.missing;playing B.missing;play

C.missed;played D.missed;to play

18.The ________ look on Miss White's face told us that she was ________ great trouble.

A.worrying;in B.worried;in

C.worrying;with D.worried;with

19.The gas tank ________ twenty gallons of gas,but now it may ________ only three gallons. A.holds;contain B.holds;include

C.is held;be contained D.is held;include

20.I've always ________ coming to China,and now my dream has ________.

A.dreamt;been realized B.dreamt of;realized

C.dreamt of;come true D.dreamt;gone true

21.The way they talked ________ the problem seemed impossible.

A.about solving B.to solve

C.of solving D.about to solve

22.The hunter ________ his gun against the pine tree and ________ down for a rest.

A.laid;lay B.lay;laid

C.laid;lied D.lied;lay

23.Many scientists say the computer will ________ human beings sooner or later.

A.take place of B.take its place

C.replace D.take place

24.However,that night was the worst one in ________.

A.a history B.history

C.the history D.any history

25.As he entered the room,he found many books ________ scattered on the floor.

A.laying B.lied

C.lain D.lying

Ⅱ.阅读理解

“There is no arguing about taste”-runs the Latin proverb.But taste did not just happen.Cultural,historical,biological and environmental events have interacted to cause frogs,for example,to be viewed as delicious in southern China but to be regarded with revulsion（厌恶） in northern China.Even though much remains unknown,tastes cannot be dismissed as inarguable or illogical;an attempt will be made here to discover why,as Lucretius put it,“What is food to one man may be fierce poison to others.”

Among the thirty million tribal people of India,a total of 250 animal species(物种) are avoided by one group or another.Most of these people will not eat meat from a tiger or any of various snakes.Although they say they feel a relationship with these animals,it is obvious that both are highly dangerous and that hunting them systematically would be foolish.

Monkeys are avoided,probably because they look like human beings in appearance;in these tribes,man-eating is viewed as extremely cruel.That the tribal people don't eat some female animals has come from respect for the mother's role,but it could also be due to a policy of allowing the females to reproduce and provide more young for people.Many tribes avoid eating any animal that has died of unknown causes-an intelligent attitude in view of the possibility that the animal might have died from a disease that could spread to humans.Animals that consume garbage are similarly avoided-an adaptive step that prevents contact with parasites（寄生虫）,and that might explain why members of one tribe eat any of twenty-one different species of rats,but not the house rats.

1.“There is no arguing about taste”,which means ________.

A.people don't like to talk about food

B.one's taste in food is hard to explain

C.there is no quarrelling about to eat

D.no arguments about taste have been heard of before

2.It can be concluded from the first paragraph that ________.

A.the author is against eating frogs

B.taste is illogical and inarguable C.some types of frogs are poisonous

D.taste is determined by many factors

3.The tribal people in India may not eat the following animals EXCEPT________ .

A.donkeys

B.tigers

C.female deer

D.house rats

4.The passage is probably written for the purpose of ________.

A.introducing the eating habit of Indian tribal people

B.tell different types of taste apart

C.describing people's different choices of taste

D.explaining the relationship between taste and tribes

5.Which is not the possible reason of not eating female monkeys?

A.People respect mothers of all kinds.

B.Female monkeys and human beings look alike.

C.Female monkeys give birth to more young.

D.Female monkeys may spread a certain disease.

Ⅲ.短文改错

When I was a young child,search for grey hairs for 1.________

my father was a great favorite of mine,because of I 2.________

could get a reward of one jiao if I found it.At 3.________

that time,I was eager that all my father's hair 4.________

would be grey…Ten years late,I was lucky 5.________

enough to accepted by a famous university.The 6.________

day I left,father kept telling me take care of 7.________

myself and studied hard and so on.To my surprise, 8.________

most of my hair had turned grey over-night,but I 9.________

didn't feel as happily as before.Tears danced in my eyes. 10.________

Now,I always think of my father's grey hair…

Ⅳ.书面表达

假如你校与美国某中学是友好学校，美方中学的校刊来信了解你校学生课外活动情况，经问卷调查，所了解的情况如下面的表格所示。请你根据此表内容用英语写一篇短文，介绍有关情况。

课外活动时间活动项目最受欢迎的项目希望与建议

每天一节

4:00p.m.~

5:00 p.m

体育、阅读ば巳ば∽楠じ栉

球类比赛じ栌窖萁脖热の⒒ 增加课外活动时间，减少作业量。多安排专题讲座，多组织旅游参观以了解社会。

要求：

1.不要按表格逐项翻译。

2.字数100个左右，短文题目已给出。

Out-of-class Activities in Our School

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习（现在完成时被动语态）

1.You can see the house ________ for years.

A.isn't painted B.hasn't painted

C.hasn't been painted D.hadn't been painted

2.Some new oil fields ________ since 1976.

A.were opened up

B.has opened up

C.have been opened up

D.had been opened up

3.A good deal of money ________ spent on books.

A.have B.has

C.have been D.has been

4.-Why does Ling Ling look so unhappy?

-She has ________ by her classmates.

A.laughed B.laughed at

C.been laughed D.been laughed at

5.This is a photo of the power station that ________ in my hometown.

A.has set up B.has been set up

C.was set up D.is set up

6.Great changes ________ in the city,and a lot of factories ________.

A.have been taken place;have been set up

B.have taken place;have been set up

C.have taken place;have set up

D.were taken place;were set up

7.No permission has ________ for anybody to enter the building.

A.been given B.given

C.to give D.been giving

8.The police found that the house ________ and a lot of things ________.

A.had broken into;had been stolen

B.had broken into;had been stolen

C.had been broken into;stolen

D.has been broken into;stolen

9.-Have you moved into the new house?

-Not yet.The rooms ________.

A.are painted B.have been painted

C.are being painted D.are being painting

10.-Do you know our town at all?

-No,this is the first time I ________ here.

A.was B.have been

C.came D.am coming

11.-________ the sports meet might be put off.

-Yes,it all depends on the weather.

A.I've been told B.I've told

C.I'm told D.I told

12.All the performances for the task ________,and we're ready to start.

A.completed B.complete

C.had been completed D.have been completed

13.The manager entered the office and was happy to learn that four-fifths of the tickets ________.

A.was booked B.had been booked

C.were booked D.have been booked

14.Every possible means ________ to prevent the air pollution,but the sky is still not clear.

A.is used B.are used

C.had been used D.have been used

15.Mrs Green wants to buy that kind of cloth because she ________ that the cloth ________ very well.

A.has been told;washes

B.has told;washes

C.has been told;is washed

D.is told;is washed

16.-Is the house at the end of the street still for sale?

-No,it ________.

A.was sold B.had sold

C.has sold D.has been sold

17.-________ to buy some new dishes?

-Yes,all of our dinner plates ________.

A.Would you go;has broken

B.Are you going;has been broken

C.Will you go;are breaking

D.Have you gone;had been broken

18.Now many ways ________ to prevent the water from ________.

A.were taken;polluting

B.have been taken;being polluted

C.are taken;pollution

D.are taken;polluted

19.The train ________ because of an accident.Many passengers are now waiting anxiously at the railway station.

A.had been delayed B.delayed

C.has delayed D.has been delayed

20.The teaching building of our school ________ for many times.

A.has been added to B.had been added up to

C.has added to D.has added up to

参考答案

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.C 表示“由你决定”。

2.C 地点状语+谓语+主语，此句是个倒装句，主语a collection of laboratory buildings 决定谓语lie是不及物动词，表“位于”。

3.A throw away表“丢弃”“未能利用某物”。put down镇压。give in屈服、让步。break off中断。

4.B pleasure表具体的令人快乐的人或事时，为可数名词，常用单数。

5.D 表运动项目。

6.A 根据句意“有许多问题要解决”，表未发生用to do。D选项表示“解决完了”。

7.D where表示“……的地方”，引导状语从句。

8.D

9.A be dressed表状态。wear需要接宾语。

10.B

11.A suggestion表建议，从句用（should） do。

12.B seat为及物动词，常用于seat oneself和be seated表达中。

13.B 表节省。

14.C 答语是省略句，all including Jane's是主语。

15.C contain表“含有”。

16.D give up表“放弃”。give off表“发出（气味等）”，give out表“分发”“被用完”。 17.A missing表丢失，等于lost。小男孩被看见在湖边玩，所以用see sb. doing。

18.B -ed分词修饰look,expression,voice等，表示人流露出……的表情、声音。

19.A hold表容纳，contain表（里面）装有。

20.C dream of/about doing;come true相当于be realized,表“被实现”。

21.D they talked about是定语从句修饰the way。“to solve the problem”作定语也修饰the way。

22.A 第一空需填及物动词lay，第二空则需填不及物动词lie。lay,laid,laid;lie,lay,lain。 23.C 表代替，相当于take the place of。tkae place表“发生”。

24.B

25.D found接宾语many books,再接宾补，lying是lie“平躺、平放”的分词，表明books的状态。

Ⅱ.阅读理解

1.B 本文讲述造成饮食习惯的原因是多方面的，是无法去争吵或解释的。

2.D 本文的第一段的第二句是第一段的主旨句，前一句引起读者注意，第二句说明原因，后面举例说明原因，最后一句作用在于引出下文。

3.A 排除法可得出A。

4.C 本文介绍了人们不同的饮食选择及部分原因，不仅仅指印度人的饮食习惯。

5.D

Ⅲ.短文改错

1.search→searching 2.去掉of 3.if→once 4.√ 5.late→later 6.to∧accepted加be 7.me∧take加to 8.studied→study 9.my→his 10.happily→happy

Ⅳ.书面表达

Out-of-class Activities in Our School

Students in our school have one period for out-of-class activities from 4:00 p.m. to 5:00 p.m. every day.We can join in singing and dancing,do reading or take part in many interest groups.Our favorite activities are sports/ball games,singing,speech contests and learning how to use computers.We've learnt a lot from these activities.

We hope that we'll be given more time for such activities and less homework to do after class.It is our suggestion that more lectures on some interesting subjects be held.

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习

1.C for years作状语，句子使用完成时；house与paint是被动关系，所以选C。

2.C since短语作状语，句子用现在完成时；主语fields与open up是被动关系。

3.D 现在完成时表影响。money与spend是被动关系。

4.D laugh at sb.表“嘲笑某人”。Ling Ling因为被人嘲笑而不开心，所以用被动。

5.B 定语从句中，that作主语，替代the power station,所以从句谓语用单数，且从句谓语与the power station是被动关系，故选B。

6.B take place,happen,break out表“发生”，都没有被动语态。

7.A permission与give是被动关系。

8.A break into表“闯入”，与the house是被动关系。that宾语从句中，and连接两个句子。

9.C 据题意，“还没搬进新房”，所以新房应是正在被粉刷。

10.B It is the+序+ time+从句，此结构中，从句用现在完成时。

11.A C选项时态错误，“我”是过去被告知的。

12.D performance与complete是被动关系，从后半句可知不是过去的时态。

13.B book动作发生在entered之前，故用过去完成时。book表“预定”，与tickets是被动关系。

14.C 表影响，用完成时。means单复数同形，every means接单数谓语。

15.A 前半句she与tell是被动关系。后半句中，wash+副词，描述事物性质，用主动表被动。

16.D 表影响，且是被动关系，用现在完成时被动语态。

17.B be broken表“碎了，坏了”。

18.B take ways to do sth.中way与take是动宾关系，way作主语，take 则用被动。prevent+sb./sth.from doing,表“使……免于……”，水与pollute是被动关系。19.D

20.A add to…表“增建，扩建，增加”。

篇13：学习手册Unit4 Unforgettable experiences(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

unforgettable,tomb,iceberg,host,used to,on fire,broken,disaster,typhoon,earthquake,rescue,

roar,mass,advance,seize,sweep,swallow,drag,pull,struggle,fright,flow,crack,chimney,cut down,

completely,shake,strike,destroy,deadline,publish,the next moment,bookworm,couch potato,

workaholic,fan,agent,Buddha,temple,naughty,peanut

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

It is clear to me that…

What would you do?

First…,next…,then…,finally…

What is it like?

How did you feel about this holiday?

Can you name…?

Why did you choose to go there?

How did you get there?

Ⅲ.语法

学习关系代词引导的定语从句

●学习障碍

Ⅰ.单词及短语

against,mass,used to,on fire,cut down,completely,strike,hand in,seize,struggle,stand,fear,fright,

must have done

Ⅱ.语法

定语从句中关系代词who/ whom/ which/ that/ whose的用法。

●学习策略

Ⅰ.单词及短语部分

1.against prep.

纵向归纳法：

（1）表示反对关系

I will speak against anything I know to be wrong.

Their whole life is a fight against poverty and unemployment.

(2)（表示位置关系）靠着，顶着，迎着，衬着

A little piano stood against the wall.

She pressed her face against the glass.

The picture looks good against that light wall.

(3)预防，防备，准备……时用

We are all taking medicine against the disease.

(4)be against 反对 I knew she was against us.

违反，违背 It was against the law.

不利于 Almost everything was against him.

联系语境法：

The pine trees were black ________ the morning sky.

A.in B.to C.against D.under

答案：C 根据语境，松树衬着天空。

2.mass n.

纵向归纳法：

(1)一堆，一团，一大块

There is a mass of stones in the yard.

(2)大量，大批

There was a mass of children in the hall.

I've masses of work to do.

3.used to

纵向归纳法：

(1)used to do sth.过去常常……(现在已不如此)

We used to grow beautiful roses.

注意:否定句和疑问句有两种

You usedn't to make that mistake.

She didn't use(d)to do it,did she?

You used to smoke a pipe,didn't you?/ use(d)n't you?

(2)be used to +n./ doing习惯于

I have always been used to hard work.

He became used to such a diet.

I'm not used to treating patients this way.

I'm not used to being treated like this.

(3)be used to do 被用来做……

This knife is used to cut bread.

横向归纳法：

表示 “过去常常……”时,used to与would区别

(1)would只强调过去常常……,used to说明现在不是如此。

The old woman would sit there for hours doing nothing.

(2)would只接行为动词,used to 可接行为动词和表状态的词。

There used to be a temple at the foot of the mountain.

联系语境法：

I ________ being treated like that.

A.don't used to B.didn't used to

C.am not used to D.used to

答案:C 我不习惯于被人这样对待用be used to doing/ n.。

4.cut down

纵向归纳法：

(1)砍倒

If you cut down all the trees you will ruin the land.

(2)减少,削减

I have decided to cut down my smoking.

横向归纳法：

(1)cut up 破碎,切碎

They cut down the tree and cut it up for firewood.

(2)cut off

切断,停掉

Our water supply has been cut off again.

隔绝,挡住

The floods cut us off from our homes.

使电话中断

We were cut off in the middle of our telephone conversation.

(3)cut… in/ into pieces 把……切成碎片

The vegetables should be cut into small pieces and dropped into the boiling water.

联系语境法：

Is George trying to cut his weight________?

A.off B.down

C.up D.through

答案: B cut down weight减少体重

5.completely adv.完全地

The eighteenth century developed a completely new kind of novel.

纵向归纳法：

(1)complete adj.完整的,全部的；完成

Is this a complete story?

When will the work on the new railway be complete?

(2)complete v.完成

The workmen haven't completed the house yet.

(3)completion n.(不可数)完成,结束

After the completion of the job the workman went home.

横向归纳法：

complete 与finish表 “完成”时的区别

(1)complete 作及物动词, 只接n.或pron.

The railway is not completed yet.

(2)finish

不及物动词

I can't come till I have completed.

及物动词, 接n.或doing

When did you finish your college course?

I finished reading the book last night.

6.strike

纵向归纳法：

(1)打，敲,击, 砍,打中,击中

He struck me with his fist.

The house was struck by lightning.

(2)发起进攻,袭击

He moved away as the animal struck.

(3)撞,触(礁)

His head struck the table as he fell.

(4)擦(火柴)

I struck a match and held it to his cigarette.

(5)(某种想法法：)忽然出现,忽然想起

A happy thought struck her.

(6)给人深刻印象(常用于被动语态)

I was struck by her beauty.

(7)罢工

They are striking for higher pay.

（8)(钟)敲(响)

We waited for the clock to strike six.

横向归纳法：

(1)hit 打,敲, 击,击中,射中

He hit a ball over the fence.

The stone hit the window.

使……受到打击

The bad news hit every one hard.

(2)beat 连续有节奏地打,敲

He was beating a drum.

The rain beat against the window.

(心)跳动

His heart had stopped beating.

(鸟翼)扑动

The bird beat its wings rapidly as it flew on.

打败,打赢,取胜

Our champion can beat all runners in the country.

The difficulty has beaten him.

联系语境法：

It was dark in the room so Robinson ________ a match.

A.struck B.burnt

C.fired D.lit

答案:A strike a match划火柴, lit是light的过去式.可以说light a fire点火,light a candle点蜡烛。

7.hand in 交上去(给老师或上级),交来(hand v.)

Each student has to hand in a composition once a week.

横向比较法：

(1)hand down 传下来,传给

Our father handed down these customs to us.

(2)hand…to…传给

They will hand the photograph to those who have not seen it.

(3)hand out 发给大家,散发

The teacher handed out the books at the beginning of the lesson.

8.seize vt.

纵向归纳法：

(1)(突然)抓-

He seized her hand and shook it heartily.

(2)夺取,攻占,没收,抓获

The soldiers seized the city.

The weapons found in the house were seized by the police.

(3)(用于引申意义)抓住(机会等),理解(意思)

She was quick to seize the meaning of his words.

Robert seized an opportunity to speak to him alone.

(4)seize hold of (突然)抓-

She seized hold of the child and pulled it back from the edge of the cliff.

综合运用法：

________ the enemy spy,soldiers returned to their station.

A.Seizing B.Seized

C.Having seized D.Having been seized

答案:C解答此题须综合运用分词知识,seize 是the soldiers发出的动作, 用现在分词,又因为此题要体现出先抓住敌人,然后返回的先后顺序,故用现在分词的完成时。

9.struggle

纵向归纳法：

(1)挣扎,奋力,作努力,斗争

They have struggled for years to free their country from the enemy.

The people were struggling to get out of the burning house.

(2)挣扎着走,费力地走

The sick man struggled along the road to his home.

(3)struggle against 和……斗争,搏斗

We had to struggle against strong winds all the way home.

(4)struggle for 为……而斗争

The poor had to struggle for a living.

(5)struggle with 和……斗争

He has been struggling with illness in his life.

He struggled with the mad man till help came.

联系语境法：

The children struggled ________ the heavy snow.

A.to B.through

C.on D.past

答案:B 联系语境,费力地在大雪中走,through表示穿过。

10.stand

纵向归纳法：

(1)站着,站起来

stand on one's (own)feet/ legs 依靠自己,自主

After his father died,John had to stand on his own feet and earn his own living.

stand on one's head/ hands倒立

The beggar stood on his head and sang songs.

(2)在(某处),位于(某处),存在

A little piano stood against the wall.

A village stands at the foot of the hill.

(3)忍受,经受

He could not stand that horrible English climate.

综合运用法：

There ________ several pine trees on the side of the hill.

A.is B.laid

C.stands D.stand

答案:D解此题须综合运用There be 句型的知识。There be 句型中be 可用lie,stand,sit,flow 等词,根据语境表示不同的意思, 此题中主语是several pine trees,是复数, 应使用are或lie,stand等,laid是lay 的过去式,表放置或产卵,不符合题意。

11.fear

纵向归纳法：

(1)恐惧(多作不可数名词)

They had no fear of Great Britain and France.

His face was growing pale with fear.

I couldn't move for fear.

忧虑,担心的事(可数)

There is no reason for your fears.

for fear of 由于怕……,以防

He left an hour early for fear of missing his train.

for fear (that)惟恐,怕的是,以防

She worried for fear that the child would be hurt.

in fear of 害怕,担心

The thief was in fear of the police.

(2)v.恐惧,害怕接n./pron.

Cats fear big dogs.

恐惧,害怕，接to do

Don't fear to tell the truth.

恐怕，担心，接从句

She feared that she might not find him in his room.

综合运用法：

They spoke in a low voice ________ waking up the sleeping child.

A.for fear of B.in case

C.for fear that D.not to

答案:A 解此题须综合运用非谓语动词知识和连词知识。B和C是连词,后接句子,D是不定式,接动词原形。for fear of 是介词短语,接动名词作宾语。

12.fright n.

纵向归纳法： (1)惊吓,害怕(不可数)

She was filled with fright at the sight.

(2)一次惊吓(可数)

You gave me a fright by knocking so loudly at the door.

(3)in fright 惊恐地,害怕地

The child turned and ran in fright from the growling dog.

纵向归纳法：

(1)frighten vt.吓住,使惊吓

He left his gun outside so as not to frighten his wife.

(2)frightful adj.可怕的

It was a frightful storm.

联系语境法：

The boy was ________ by the noise of the explosion.

A.afraid B.nervous

C.fearful D.frightened

答案: D be frightened by被……吓着, afraid害怕的,常用be afraid of,nervous紧张的,fearful害怕的,常用be fearful of。

13.must 表示肯定推测

纵向归纳法：

(1)must + 表状态的动词原形, 表对现在的推测。

The man over there must be his headteacher.

(2)must + be + doing (行为动词), 表对现在的推测。

The boys must be reading in the classroom now.

(3)must + have done,表对已经发生过的动作或事情的推测。

There must have been a quarrel between the couple.

The boy must have read the book.

He must have stayed up late last night.

注意：must表推测时的反意疑问句

（1）对现在的推测,be(not)+主语？

The man over there must be his headteacher,isn't he?

The boy must be reading in the classroom now,isn't he?

（2）对已发生过的动作或事情的推测。

句中有明确的表过去的时间状语，did/ was(were)(not)+ 主语？

He must have stayed up late last night,didn't he?

句中没有明确的表过去的时间状语，have(has)(not)+主语？

The boy must have read the book,hasn't he?

横向比较法：

must be doing与must do的区别:

must be doing 表示对现在进行的动作的推测。

He must be sleeping now.

must do 表示必须或一定要做某事。

He must do his homework now.

Ⅱ.语法部分

限制性定语从句中关系代词的用法

纵向归纳法：

1.关系代词在限制性定语从句中充当的成分

主语宾语定语

指人 who/that whom/that whose

指物 which/that which/that whose

人和物 that that whose

2.如何选用定语从句的关系代词

首先确定定语从句的先行词，然后把先行词带回到定语从句中，看其在定语从句中作什么成分，根据先行词是人指物确定关系代词。

Where is the man________ was here?

先行词是the man,把the man带回到定语从句中，构成完整的句子the man was there,句中the man作主语，且指人，故填who/that.

3.注意：

（1）定语从句中关系代词充当宾语时，可以省略。

（2）作宾语时，who可代替whom.

（3）whose引导定语从句时，既可指人，又可指物。

Linda lives in the room whose window faces south.

Do you know the girl whose mother is working in our school?

横向比较法：

1.that与who

(1)先行词是anyone和those(指人)时，用who。

I'd like to talk to anyone who speaks to me.

(2)当主语是以who开头的疑问句时，用that。

Who is the girl that is sitting by the window?

（3）先行词中既有人又有物时，用that。

2.that与which

(1)用that的情况：

先行词是指物的all,everything,nothing,something,anything,little,few,much,none等不定代词。

There is still much that can be improved.

先行词被all,every,no,some,any,little,much,neither等修饰。

I've read all the books that were borrowed from the library.

先行词被the only,the very,the last,the next等修饰。

Hamlet is the very book that I want to read again.

先行词被形容词的最高级修饰。

Light blue is the best colour that suits her.

先行词被序数词修饰。

The first thing that we should do is to work out a plan.

前已有疑问代词时，为避免重复。

Which of the books that had pictures was not worth reading?

先行词中有人又有物。

The people and things that he met were strange to him.

(2)用which的情况：

先行词是指物的that或those。

He found that which he was looking for.

击破定式法：

注意：

下列句型之间的比较

1.A.Is this the film ________ you talked about just now?

B.Is this film ________ you talked about just now?

A.that B.the one

C.when D.where

答案：AB 解此题时，首先还原成陈述句This is the film…This film is …,A句主句成分完整，直接用引导词，B句主句成分不完整，先保证成分完整，再运用关系代词。

2.A.He is one of the students who ________ good at English.

B.He is the one of the students who ________ good at English.

A.is B.are

C.be D.to be

答案：BA A句先行词是the students,从句的谓语用复数；B句先行词是the one,即从句修饰the one,从句的谓语用单数。

3.A.The girl ________ I think was honest fooled me.

B.The girl ________ I think to be honest fooled me.

A.who B.whom

C.which D.from whom

答案：AB A句I think是插入语，去掉后，句子的成分完整，定语从句中缺主语。B句I think不是插入语，I think在定语从句中作主语和谓语，先行词the girl 带回从句中作think的宾语。

4.A.Charles is a strange character ________ dislikes parties.

B.Charles has a fine character ________ makes him easy to get along with.

A.who B.whom

C.which D.in which

答案：AC A句中character意为“人，人物”，这个人不喜欢晚会。B句中character意为“性格”，这个性格使他很容易相处。

●方法实践

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.I need one more stamp before my collection ________.

A.had completed B.completes

C.has been completed D.is completed

2.The road to the mountains ________ by the snow for almost a month.

A.has been cut off B.have been cut off

C.has been cut down D.have been cut down

3.As middle school students,we ________ the police to keep order.

A.are used to help B.used to helping

C.used to help D.used to be helped

4.The two men ________ fire to the shop,which they had ________.

A.set;stolen B.set;robbed

C.caught;stolen D.caught;robbed

5.The little girl was frightened ________ the sight of mouse.

A.with B.at

C.in D.on

6.When she came into the office,the clock ________ eight.

A.rang B.hit

C.struck D.turned

7.Last night I ________ Mr.Black and had a long talk with him.

A.called on B.called at

C.call up D.call at

8.She ________ me by the hand warmly when we met.

A.pressed B.shook

C.was shaking with D.either B or C

9.There used to be a map of Scotland on the wall,________?

A.did there B.didn't there

C.was there D.were there

10.The lion made a sudden noise and ________.

A.struggled on its feet B.leaped to feet

C.leaped on its feet D.struggled to its feet

11.The door bell rang again,and ________ she heard her letter box being pushed open.

A.the next moment B.for a while

C.in time D.at once

12.Suddenly ________ fire broke out in the workshop,but some of the workers managed to put out ________ fire.

A.a;the B./;the

C.the;the D./;/

13.After all the students had taken their seats,the teacher ________ the examination papers.

A.handed in B.handed on

C.handed out D.handed over

14.The mountain looks grey ________ the blue sky.

A.over B.for

C.under D.against

15.________ is known to all,China will be an ________ and powerful country in 20 or 30 years' time.

A.That;advancing B.This;advance

C.As;advanced D.It;advancing

16.He decided to put the ________ glass on top of the wall to stop boys ________ over it.

A.broken;climbing B.breaking;climbing

C.broken;to climb D.breaking;to climb

17.When ________,the museum will be open to the public next year.

A.completed B.completing

C.being completed D.to be completed

18.(上海春招)He stood on one leg ________ against the wall,while he took off his shoes. A.lying B.leaning

C.falling D.stopping

19.Too terrible! I can't ________ that noise any longer.It will drive my crazy.

A.keep B.stand

C.hold D.touch

20.Mother ________ us stories when we were young.

A.was used to tell B.is used to telling

C.used to tell D.used to telling

21.(1993上海)Children at the beginning of this century ________ a lot and ________ themselves greatly even without television.

A.used to read; enjoying B.used to read; enjoyed

C.were used to reading; enjoy D.were used to read; enjoying

22.When he was sixty years old,he ________ his hometown.

A.returned B.returned back

C.returned to D.went back

23.The visitors were all deeply ________ by the beauty of the West Lake.

A.struck B.beaten

C.hit D.knocked

24.Lying in bed,we listened to the heavy rain ________ the window.

A.hitting B.knocking

C.beating D.striking

25.Parents must take good care of their children,________they ?

A.don't B.needn't

C.aren't D.mustn't

Ⅱ.完形填空

It was a small town in England.The people there worked hard but they always got poor 1 .The weather was cold and wet and it was bad for their 2 .There was only a primary school in the town and 3 people were so poor that they couldn't send their children there.

Mr Morgan, 4 father was the headmaster,was sent to a university in the capital.He 5 law there and knew much.He usually 6 to his hometown during his holidays and a lot of his friends wanted to 7 him.They asked a lot about the capital and hoped to be given some advice on their own 8 .The young man was warm-hearted and was 9 to help them.He was busy there but he didn't 10 it.

Mr Waley,one of the Morgan's neighbours,had a shop in the center of the town.He had been a soldier in France and always 11 he knew more and liked to talk with others.But he got into trouble and 12 Mr Morgan could help him.But before the young man said a 13 ,he talked on and on in a flaw of eloquence.Mr Morgan 14 him for nearly an hour and then he began to pour him a cup of tea.The cup was full but he didn't 15 and went on pouring.The shopkeeper felt 16 and said,“Haven't you found the cup is full? You can't pour any tea into it.”

“You're 17 ,Mr Waley,” the young man stopped to say.“Your brain has been full of all kinds of 18 like the full cup.How can I help you 19 I give you an empty one? You come here to ask me for 20 you know!”

1.A.education B.harvests

C.soil D.government

2.A.health B.lives

C.crops D.animals

3.A.most B.few

C.a few D.no

4.A.his B.which

C.that D.whose

5.A.hated B.discussed

C.studied D.explained 6.A.returned B.agreed

C.replied D.wrote

7.A.play with B.flight with

C.offer D.visit

8.A.studies B.business

C.farming D.science

9.A.ready B.successful

C.proper D.impossible

10.A.forget B.remember

C.like D.mind

11.A.advised B.thought

C.described D.discovered

12.A.made B.ordered

C.hoped D.suggested

13.A.story B.word

C.passage D.reason

14.A.heard B.talked with

C.reported D.listened to

15.A.stop B.rest

C.sit down D.find

16.A.sorry B.angry

C.strange D.happy 17.A.wrong B.right

C.polite D.wise

18.A.opinions B.questions

C.problems D.projects

19.A.when B.after

C.if D.unless

20.A.saving B.money

C.advice D.wish

Ⅲ.短文改错

The Dead Sea is really a larger lake.The river Jordan 1.________

flows into it.It's surface has an area of over a thousand 2.________

square kilometers.Because there is no outlet and the weather is 3.________

very hot,the water is slowly flowing up,the water in the sea 4.________

has unpleasant smell and a very salty bitter taste.It is full 5.________

with salt and other minerals.Human bodies will not sink in 6.________

it.People can sit up there and to read newspapers without 7.________

sinking,but it is not a good place for swimming,so the water 8.________

is bad for the skin.No alive things can live in it.That is 9.________

why it called the Dead Sea. 10.________ Ⅳ.书面表达

下面一段文字叙述了你在4月15日在北京站所经历的事.请根据以下内容要点,用英语写一篇120字左右的日记。

1.早晨去北京站为叔叔送行。

2.在候车室里见一位大娘在哭,因为丢了车票,无钱再买。

3.见此情景,你想上去帮助。

4.两位解放军战士过去安慰老人,给她买了票。老人感动,问其姓名地址,他们没有回答,微笑离去。

5.你的感想

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习(定语从句中关系代词的用法)

1.Is the river ________ through that town very large?

A.which flows B.flows

C.that flowing D.whose flows

2.The poor man ________ lost his money just now is called John.

A.that B.which

C.who D.whom

3.Those ________ know the answer put up your hands.

A.who B.which

C.that D.whom

4.Ahead of me I saw a woman ________ I thought was my aunt.

A.who B.whom

C.of whom D.whose

5.BBC English is ________ people ________ want to improve their English.

A.for;who B.for;to whom

C.to;who D.to;what

6.Here is the girl ________ schoolbag has been stolen.

A.who B.whom

C.whose D.her

7.-Did you ask the guard what happened?

-Yes,he told me all ________ he knew.

A.about which B.which

C.that D.what

8.This is the only one of the books ________ we need.

A.which B.what

C.that D.all

9.We should do ________ those in danger.

A.that we can to help B.all we can to help

C.all we can help D.all what we can to help

10.The doctor ________ is leaving for Africa next month.

A.the nurse is talking to him B.whom the nurse is talking

C.the nurse is talking to D.who the nurse is talking

11.A child ________ parents are dead is called orphan.

A.which B.his

C.whose D.with

12.His parents wouldn't let him marry anyone ________ family was poor.

A.of whom B.whom

C.of whose D.whose

13.All ________ is needed is a supply of oil.

A.the thing B.that

C.what D.which

14.All of the flowers now raised here have developed from those ________ in the forest.

A.once they grew B.they grew once

C.that once grew D.once grew

15.We'll call on the man ________ we believe can speak very good English.

A.who B.whom

C.whoever D.which

16.Social customs of America are more like ________ of England than of any other country. A.those B.what

C.which D.that

17.They talked for about an hour of things and persons ________ they remembered in the school.

A.which B.that

C.who D.whom

18.The Great Wall is the last place ________ Mr.Smith is going to visit before he leaves Beijing.

A.where B.which

C./ D.what

19.I'm wondering ________ he expects will win the gold medal in Men's Single.

A.whom B.which

C.who D.what

20.The bread ________ her mother made was much delicious than that ________ you bought at food shops.

A./;which B.that;who

C.which;what D./;/

参考答案

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.D complete是及物动词,此题中用被动关系。综合运用时态问题,主句是将来时,从句用现在时。

2.A cut down表砍倒,减少,cut off切断供应,隔绝,主语是the road,是单数。

3.C used to do 过去常常,be used to do 表被动关系,be used to doing习惯于。

4.B set fire to sth.放火烧……,catch fire着火,which引导的是非限制性定语从句,修饰the shop,rob some place of sth.抢劫某地为了某物,steal sth.from some place 从某地偷走某物。

5.B be frightened at 由于……而吓坏了,at与某些形容词或分词(angry,delighted,glad,happy,sad,surprised等)连用时,表示引起某种情绪的原因。

6.C the clock struck eight 钟敲响了八下,敲钟用strike。

7.A call on 拜访某人,call at 拜访某地,call up打电话,时态不对。

8.B shake 表 “握手”时,为shake one by the hand= shake one's hand。

9.B used to 表过去常常,反意疑问句用didn't/ usedn't,本题是there be 句型。

10.D struggle to one's feet表 “挣扎地站起来”,是固定短语,leap跳过,跳越,leap to one's feet “突然站起来”。

11.A 联系语境,门铃响了,然后信箱被推开了。the next moment下一刻,for a while 一会儿,in time及时,迟早,at once立刻。

12.A 一场火灾fire可数,但本题中第一次提出,不特指,put out the fire灭火,特指前文提到的火灾。

13.C hand out分发,hand in递交,hand on传给,hand over交给

14.D 联系语境,在蓝天的衬托下,against表衬着。

15.C advanced 作形容词,表 “先进的”,as引导非限制性定语从句,D it应用于It is known to all that…。

16.A broken glass打碎的玻璃,过去分词表示被动关系或完成,而现在分词表主动关系或正在进行中,故不用breaking,stop sb.(from) doing 阻止某人做某事。

17.A 把从句补充完整When the museum is completed,当从句的主语与主句的主语一致时,可以把从句的主语和be动词省略,即when completed。

18.B lean against the wall依靠着墙。

19.B 联系语境,我无法忍受噪音.stand 表示忍受,一般用于否定句。

20.C 当我们小的时候,妈妈经常给我们讲故事.used to do 过去经常,be used to do表示被动,be used to doing习惯于。

21.B C项中enjoy应用enjoyed 与were并列,或用enjoying与reading并列。

22.C return表 “归来”,是不及物动词,后+ to ,return = go/ come back,因此不能与back连用.再如repeat不能与again连用,favorite/ perfect不能与形容词的最高级连用。

23.A 联系语境,被美景打动了,用strike。

24.C beat表示连续地敲打,或有节奏地跳动,hit表示打一下,击中,strike指突然性或一次性的击打,雨点打在窗户上,是连续不断地敲打,用beat。

25.B 联系语境,此题中must表示 “必须”,反意疑问句用needn't,mustn't表示 “禁止,不准”,如果must表示推测用法时,应根据具体情况用不同的助动词。

Ⅱ.完形填空

1.B 根据上下文，劳动与收成有直接联系。

2.C 寒冷与潮湿对庄稼不利。

3.A 根据上下文，收成不好，大多数人无法送子女上学。

4.D 非限制性定语从句，他的父亲。

5.C 学习法律。

6.A 假期回家。

7.D 根据上下文，人们要向他请教，所以来拜访他。

8.B Mr.Morgan对农活不懂，人们要问的自然是与他们自己的事务有关的事。

9.A Mr.Morgan 热心肠，乐于助人，be ready to help sb.。

10.D 根据上下文。

11.B 认为自己懂得多。

12.C 根据上下文。

13.B Mr.Morgan还没来得及说话，邻居就开始夸夸其谈。

14.D 根据上下文。

15.A 根据上下文。

16.C 因为杯子满了，Mr.Morgan还不停，所以邻居很奇怪。

17.B 根据上下文。

18.A 头脑中充满了各种想法。

19.D 根据上下文。

20.C ask sb.for advice向某人征求建议。

Ⅲ.短文改错

1.larger→large 上下文没有比较含义

2.It's→Its It's 是It is 的缩写

3.weather→climate 文中需要的是 “气候”,而weather指天气

4.在the water前加and

5.在unpleasant 前加an 这里的small 是某一种气味,可数

6.with→of be full of 充满

7.去掉to read 与sit up 并列

8.so→because 根据上下文表原因

9.alive→living alive作后置定语。

10.在called 前加is 表被动。

Ⅳ.书面表达

April 15th, Sunny

This morning I saw off my uncle at the Beijing Railway Station.In the waiting room I saw an old lady crying sadly because she had lost her ticket and was not able to buy another one for home. I was thinking about helping her when two PLA men came up to comfort her.Then they bought her a ticket with their own money.The old lady was so moved that she could hardly say a word.She grasped their hands and asked for their names and addresses.But they only smiled and said,“It's our pleasure.We have just done what we should.” Then they left.

What lovely PLA men! I must learn from them to serve the people heart and soul.

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习

1.A 把疑问句还原成陈述句 The river ________is very large.定语从句为which flows through that town。

2.C 先行词the poor man指人,关系代词在从句中作主语,因此用who/ that,指人时who比that好。

3.A 联系语境,先行词those指人,这时关系代词用who而不用that。

4.A 定语从句为the woman was my aunt.I thought是插入语,先行词a woman带到从句中作主语,用who。

5.A 第一空填for表示目的,第二空中关系代词在定语从句中作主语,且指人。

6.C 定语从句为the girl's schoolbag has been stolen.the girl's作定语,修饰schoolbag,关系代词用whose。

7.C 先行词是all,且指事情或事物,关系代词that而不用which。

8.C 先行词前有only修饰,关系代词用that。

9.B 谓语动词do缺宾语,用all作宾语,本题的句子可转换为We should do all to help those in danger.不定式to help those in danger作目的状语,其中宾语all带有定语从句that we can do,从句中的引导词that作宾语省略,因为前文用了动词do,故从句中的do省略,因此选B。

10.C 先行词the doctor带到定语从句中,构成句子the nurse is talking to the doctor,the doctor作介词to的宾语,可以省略。

11.C 先行词a child带到从句中构成句子the child's parents are dead,the child's作定语修饰parents,因此用关系代词whose。

12.D 先行词anyone。

13.B 先行词是all,关系代词用that。

14.C 联系语境,those代替flowers,将其带到从句中,flowers once grew in the forest.,grow表示生长时是不及物动词,flowers 在从句中作主语,故选C。

15.A we believe作插入语,关系代词在从句中作主语,且指人。

16.A 这不是定语从句,因此用those代替前文中的customs(是复数)。

17.B 先行词是things and persons,指人又指物,关系代词用that。

18.C 关系代词在从句中作visit的宾语,先行词place前有last修饰,用that而不用which,作宾语可以省略。

19.C 此题中引导词引导的是宾语从句,he expects作插入语,宾语从句中缺主语,指人。

20.A 第一部分中关系代词作宾语,用that/ which,可以省略。联系语境,第二部分中that代替the bread,作先行词,关系代词在从句中作宾语,用that/ which,可以省略,但因为先行词是that,为了避免混淆,用which,且不省。

篇14：unit 6 Good manner(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

01英本（2）班蔡少芹 01031210

Period 1 Warming Up & Speaking

Step 1 Warming Up

Activity1. Talking about the good/bad manners

. T: Today we are going to learn a new unit,unit6 Good manners. And what does good manners mean? Who can tell us?

S : Polite.

T: Yes. It means “being polite, polite ways of talking and doing things.” And what is the opposite of good manners?

S: Rude, bad manners.

T: Yes. Now ,do you like people with good manners or bad manners?

S: Good manners.

T: Yes, of course. All of us like people with good manners. Now, let’s look at some pictures on the screen. Can you tell us which behavior is good manners and which behavior is bad manners?

( Show 5 pictures on the screen )

T: Is it good manners?

S: No.

T: Yes. It is bad manners to spit. What about the second picture? It is good manners?

----

(explain the rest 4 pictures as above)

T: In our daily life, there are many bad or good manners. Now ,can you give us other examples in our daily life. Please write down two things. You can discuss with your partner. Please use the structure “ It is good/ bad manners to …” or “It is polite / impolite to …”. Are you clear?

(on the screen : It is good/ bad manners to …

It is polite / impolite to … )

Activity2. Talking about the 4 pictures on Page 36

T: Ok, we know it’s very important to be good manners. And there are many ways to be good manners. Can you give me some examples?

T: Such as help others, offer the seats to the old.

T: Yes. Anything else? Thanking others and making apologies to others are also good manners. Do you know how to be good manners in the following situation? S1, suppose, I borrowed your pen yesterday. But I lost it last night. What should I say to you now?

S : Sorry.

T: Yes. I must apologize to you and say sorry to you. What does apologize mean?

(Bb: apologize v. apologize to sb. for sth.

apology n. make an apology to sb. for sth.)

T: We know making an apology is a way of being good manners. Now ,please open your book turn to Page36. There are four dialogues, please complete the dialogues with the using the expressions in the second column. Are you clear?

(2 minutes later)

T: Ok, let’s read the first dialogue together. Do you know the relation between the two persons?

S: A teacher and a student.

T: What happened to the student?

S: He was late for school.

T: Yes. So he made an apology to his teacher. Now ,let’s look at the second dialogue.

(explain dialogue2,3,4 as above)

Activity3. Asking Ss to act out the four pictures to the blackboard

T: Now do you understand the four dialogues? Did you see the Romeo and Juliet last Friday?

S: No.

T; What a pity. It was very wonderful. They are real actors and actresses. Do you want to be actors and actresses? Ok ,today I will give you the chance. Now I want some Ss to act out the four pictures to the blackboard. You can use your own words or the expressions from the book, you also can add some actions. Ok ,the first group do the first pictures. Group two, picture two. Group three, picture three. Group four, picture four.

Activity4. Three steps in a dialogue about an apology.

T: Do you how many steps in a dialogue about an apology?

Ss:

T: we usually say there are three steps in a dialogue about an apology.

( on the screen: Three steps: 1.make apologies

2.make excuses

3.accept the apologies)

T: Ok when we make apologies to others what usually say?

Ss: I am sorry. I’m terribly sorry.

T: Anything else?

T: We say accepting the apologies also is good manners. When we accept the apologies, what should us say?

S: It doesn’t matter. No problem.

T: Anything else? Ok ,now I show you some useful expressions how to make and accept the apologies.

(on the screen: Useful expressions

Ways of making apologies Possible answers

Forgive me. I’m very sorry. Oh, that’s all right.

I apologize for… Oh, well, that’s life.

I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to… It’s OK.

Oops, Sorry about that. No problem.

T: Please read it by yourselves.

Step 2: Speaking

Activity1. making a dialogue with a student

T: Ok ,now let’s practice how to make and accept the apologies. Look at the screen, there is a situation.

(on the screen: Many people are drinking at the party and there are many cups on the table. You take the wrong one. What will you say and what will you do? )

T: Ok, this is my cup (show a real cup ), but someone took it by mistake. Now, I’m looking for it.

T: S2, suppose you took my cup. Ok? Let’s make a dialogue.

T: Hey, What are you doing? That’s my cup.

S2: I’m very sorry. I’m a blind. I can’t see it.

T: It doesn’t matter. Please be careful next time.

S2: Thank you.

Activity2 asking Ss to make dialogues

T: Ok ,class. Do you know how to make a dialogue now. please look at the following two situations, then you can choose one of them to make a dialogue.

(on the screen:

Situation 1

It is raining heavily outside, and you take Jane’s umbrella which looks the same as yours. As a result, Jane has to wait for a long time.

Situation 2

You borrowed some money from your friend last Sunday, and you promised to return it to your friend today. But you still have no money.)

Step 3 Discussion: How to be a student with good manners

T: Just now, we have learned some good manners. Do you want to be a student with good manners?

Ss: Yes.

T: But do you know how to be a student with good manners? Ok , now let’s discuss it. Please discuss it in a group of four, and then I ask a reporter of each group to speak out your opinions. Are you clear?

Step 4 Summary and Homework

Activity1, Summary

T: Today we have learned some good manners, such as how to make apologies and how to accept the apologies. Please remember to use them after class. It will help you to be a student with good manners.

Activity2 Homework

1.Review the expressions

2.Preview the Listening & Integrating Skills

3.Page 117 ,Exercise 4

Period 2 Listening & Integrating Skills

Step 1 pre-listening

T: In the last period, we have learned how to make apologize and how to accept the apologies. Did you practice it after class?

Ss: Yes.

T: We know it is important, because it can help us to be a person with good manners. Last night, my friend, Bill asked me how to make apologies. Because he had to make apologies to his friend, Cliff. I wanted to know what had happened to them. Do you also want to know?

Ss: yes.

Step 2 listening

T: Ok, now, let’s listening to the tape, and then answer the question: What are the problems that Bill and Cliff talk about? When you are listening, please make some notes. Are you clear?

(listen for once )

T: Ok, now let’s check the answers …

T: Ok. Just now, we have learned there are some trouble between Bill and Cliff.

Do you want to know how Bill to make apologies to Cliff and how Cliff to accept Bill’s apologies? Ok ,open your book and turn to page 37. let’s listen to the tape again then finish the questions on the book. Are you clear?

(listen for twice)

T: Question 4 and question 6 , we have different answers for them. Let’s listen to the tape for these two questions.

(just listen these two questions for the third time )

step 3 post-listening

T: How many steps in a dialogue about apology? Do you still remember?

Ss: Three.

T: what are they?

Ss : Make apologies, make excuses and accept apologies.

T: Yes. Look at the dialogue between Bill and Cliff. Then answer the questions.

(screen :

What does Bill say to apologize for taking the bike without telling Cliff?

make apologies _______

make excuses ________

What does Cliff say?

accept apologies __________ )

step 4 pre-writing

T: Bill was very sad to lost Cliff’s bike. Now, I want to tell him a piece of good news. Because I have found Cliff’s bike. Suppose I found Cliff’s bike, what should Bill say to me?

Ss: Thank you.

T: Yes. He will express gratitude to me.

(Bb: express gratitude )

T: In which situations, we will express gratitudes to others?

Ss: When someone helps you. Or you receive a present. And when others speak highly of you.

T: Yes. And how do you express gratitudes to others?

Ss:

T: You can say thanks to your friends directly. If your frienfs live in another city, what should you do?

Ss: Make a thank-you call, write a letter or send an E-mail.

T: Yes. There are so many ways to express gratitudes.

(screen: the stituations the ways

help … directly

receive presents make a call

speak highly of … write a letter

… send an E-mail

… )

Step 5 writing

Acticity1: Read a sample letter and find out the three paragraphs’ main ideas.

T: We know write a thank-you letter is one of the ways to express gratitudes. Do you know how to write a thank-you letter?

Ss: No.

T: Ok. It doesn’t matter. Please turn your book to Page41. Now, let’s read Amy Zhang’s letter to her friends, Sam and Jenny. Please read it quickly, then find out the main idea of each paragraph.

Ar you clear?

Ss:

(3minutes later, ask three Ss to answer. And explain the passage paragraph by paragraph.)

T:Learning from Amy Zhang’s letter, we know a thank-you does not need to be long Usually yhree paragraphs will be fine. Now, please write down in your own words what each paragraph is about? Are you clear? You can discuss wiyh your partner.

(screen : Para.1 ________________________

Para.2 ________________________

Para.3 ________________________ )

(1 minute later, ask Ss to answer.)

Acticity2. Do a practice.

T: Now, we have known what to write for each paragraph. Ok. Let’s pracitse writing the first paragraph. Do you know how to write?

Ss:

T: First you must write down who you want to thanks to. Then the reason why you thanks for.

(Bb: Who

Why )

T: Are you clear now?

Ss:

T: Ok, I show you two examples. Please look at the screen.

(screen: Eg1: Thank you for helping me. Without your help, I can’t finish the work on time.

Eg2: Liu Xiang won the first prize in men’s 110-hurdle race. Our Chinese people thank him for winning honor for our country.)

T: Please write two sentences in your own words. I will give you four minutes.

Are you clear?

Ss:

(five minutes later, ask 3 ss to read out their sentences.)

Acticity3: Show myself letter and explain the form of the letter.

T: Well done. Please look at Page42, exerise2. There are four topics, please choose one of them to write a thank-you letter. Do you understand?

Ss:

T: Ok. Now, I show you a letter written by me.

(show the letter on the screen)

T: Please read the letter together.

(Read together)

T: Are you clear how to write a thank-you letter now?

Ss;

T: when you write a letter, please pay attention to the form of the letter. Where to write the date, where to write the name and so on. Do you remember?

Ss:

Step 6 Summary and Homework

Activity1, Summary

T: Today we still have learn how to make and accept the apologie.And also have learned how to express gratitude. On of the ways is to write a thank-you letter. And we have learned how to write.

Activity2 Homework 1. Write a thank-you letter.

2. Preview the Reading.

3.同步练习。

Period 3 Reading

Step1, pre- reading

T: Today I’m very happy. Do you know why? Can you guess it?

Ss:

T:Ok. Let me share you with my happiness. Please look at here. What’s this?

Ss:请柬

T: Yes. It’s an invitation. One of my friends ask me to a dinner party. But now I’m a little nervous. Why? Because the dinner party is very important. If I want to make a good impression on others, what should I have to pay attention to?

(Bb: make a good impression on sb. )

T: Can you give me some advice?

Ss:

T: For example, when I’m eating, what should I have to pay attention to? Should I eat fast?

Ss: No.

T: Should I eat much?

Ss: No.

T: Yes. I cann’t eat too fast and too much.. What about when others drink to me?

Ss:

( ask several ss to give their opinions)

T: Thank you for giving me so much advice. Look at the screen, there are some advice given by my mother.

(screen: 1, Don’t eat too much and too fast;

2, Try to talk to people sitting beside you and smile;

3, Stand up when others make a toast ;

4, Finish the drink at once;

5, Don’t stand up to get the food , wait for others to get the food for you;

6, Don’t ask for more even if you are not full. )

T:If I take yous and my mother’s advice, I think I will make a good impression on others. And I will have a good dinner. Do you think so?

Ss:

T: Now, we have known the good manners in the Chinese dinner party. Do you want to know the good manners in a western countries’ dinner party?

Ss: Yes.

T: Ok. There are some behaviors in a western countries’ dinner party. Do you know which one is polite and which one is impolite?

( ) 1.Use the knife with your right hand.

( ) 2. Put your napkin on your lap.

( ) 3. Start eating as soon as your food is served in front of you.

( ) 4. Ask for a second bowl of soup.

( ) 5. Use your fingers when eating chicken.

( ) 6. Finish eating everything on your plate .

( ) 7. Talk loudly while eating.

( ) 8. Make other people drink more spirits than they can take. )

Ss:

T: Ok. Are you familiar with them?

Ss: No.

Step2 Reading

Activity1 fast reading

T: You are not familiar with them. I’m not familiar with them., either. But, it doesn’t matter. Now, I take you to a western dinner party. Please open your book turn to page 38. today we will learn a new text, Table Manners at a Dinner Party. Please read the text quickly, then find out the answers to the above questions. Are you clear?

Ss; Yes.

T: Ok, let’s start.

(ask Ss to answer the questions one by one. Then explain the behaviors)

Activity2 careful reading

T: Ok, look at screen. There are two dinner tables.

(show two pictures of the dinner table )

T: Can you tell me which one is for Chinese dinner party and which one is for the Western dinner party?

Ss:

T: How do you know it ?

Ss:餐具不同

T: Yes. The dishware is different. What do Chinese use for eating?

Ss: Chinese use chopsticks, bowl, and plate.

T: What about the Westerners?

Ss: They use knife, fork ,spoon and so on.

T: Yes. We can see the things on the Western dinner table are more than those on Chinese dinner table. They have so many things. Do you want to know how many things on the Western dinner table?

Ss: Yes.

T: Ok. Listen to the first paragraph and find out the number of the things on the table.?

(screen: 1._____napkin

2._____small bread roll

3._____glasses

4._____spoons

5._____knives

6._____folks )

(listen to the tape for Para.1.then ask Ss to answer the questions)

T: There are so many things on the table. Do you know how to lay the things on the table?

Ss:

T :Look at the screen. I have given you the places, please put the tableware in the right places. You can discuss with your partner.

(explain it on the screen for 3 minutes )

If you are a waiter, could you tell us the order of your dishes?

(screen: dessert main course starter soup )

T: Please read Para2-3 carefully and answer the questions. Let’s start.

(2 minutes later, ask one student to answer)

T: The dishes are very nice. I show you more pictures about the dishes.

(show some pictures on the screen.)

T: For the start, which pair of knife and fork is used, the big ones or the small ones?

Ss: The small ones.

T: Do you know hoe to use them? Please look at the picture on the screen. It tells you how to use.

(Show the picture on the screen)

T; When we have the soup , which spoon do we use, the big one or the small one?

Ss: The big one.

T: Yes. And we use the small spoon to do what?

Ss; Have the dessert.

T: Yes. During the meal, we have so many delicious dishes. But what a pity, today we only just see them in the picture.. if you have the chance, you can enjoy the dishes at the restaurant.

T: Ok. Please don’t to be so excited now. You are too noisy now. When you have dinner, are you noisy, too?

Ss: No.

T: Ok, when we want to speak at table, what should we do?

Ss:

T: Ok. Please read Para4-5 carefully and answer the questions on the screen.

(screen: 1. When you are at table, what should you do? 2. What is the different custom of toasting between China and western countries? )

( 2 minutes later, ask Ss to answer)

T: Do you know what’s soft drink?

Ss:

T: Can you give me some examples?

Ss: Drinks.

T: Yes. Such as cacocalo, red wine , white wind and so on. When we make a toast, what should we do?

Ss:

T: Yes. It is different from us. Now please read the last paragraph together, then answer the questions.

(screen: 1.Do table manners change over time? What can you do if you are not sure what to do? )

( after reading ,ask a student to answer)

T: What does the host mean?

Ss:

T: What about the word formal? Can you tell me its meaning?

Ss:

T: If you have dinner with your friends or family, do you have to worry about the table’s rules?

Ss: No.

T: Why?

Ss; Because it is not a formal one.

T: Yes.

Step 3 Discussion

T: Now, we have known some good manners at the Western dinner party. Suppose a friend from America named Jack invites you to have a dinner at his home at 7:00 pm. What will you do if you want to leave a good impression?

Ss:

T: Ok. Let’s have a discussion . Please discuss it in group of four

Step 4 Homework

1. Try to find out the useful expressions in the text .

2. Page 40, Exercise 2.

3. 同步练习

Period 4 Language points & Word Study

Step1 Review

T: In the last period, we learned the table manners at the Western dinner party. Do you still remember?

Ss: Yes.

T: Ok. Now I want to ask a student to retell the next. I show you the key words on the screen. How to use… spoons… knife & fork… bigger… napkin…Starts with… pray… right hand… left… bowl of soup…Main course… fingers… finish eating…Speak quietly… not laugh…Soft drinks… health…never to drink too much…Change over time… formal… not sure… follow… )

(ask a student to retell )

Step 2. Language pointsKnowing them will help you make a good impression.”

(screen: Knowing them will help you make a good impression.1). Knowing them 是一个动名次短语，在句子中作主语。动名词在句子中相当于一个名词，可以在句子中作主语.宾语.定语和表语。

Reading aloud is very important in learning English. 作主语

Seeing is believing. 作主语和表语

They suggested going to the zoo tomorrow. 作宾语

His hobby is collecting stamps. 作表语

The factory built a swimming pool last spring. 作定语

2). Impression “印象，感觉”The first impression is very important.

make / leave a good /bad /poor impression on sb.给某人留下好/坏/差的印象

The book left / made a deep impression on him.)

T: Let’s look at the next sentence.

(screen: mean doing sth 意味着做某事…… mean to do sth 打算，计划做某事I mean to go, but my father would not allow me to.

我想去，但是我父亲不肯让我去。

To raise wage means increasing purchasing power.

赠加工资意味着增加购买力。

Eg: The bad weather meant ______ the plane for 4 hours.

A. delaying B. delayed C. to delay D. having delayed )

T: In the sentence “ In China, you sometimes get a hot, damp cloth to clean your face and hands, which, however, is not the custom in western countries.” What does the word which refer to?

Ss:

T: Yes. It refers the sentence before it.

T: Ok,let’s look the second paragraph. In the sentence “ Dinner starts with a small dish, which is often called a starter.” What does the word which refer to?

Ss: A small dish.

T: Yes. Please look at the screen.

(screen: Dinner starts with a small dish ,which is often called a starter. 正餐常以一道小菜开始，这道菜常称为开胃菜。start with =begin with : 以..….开始

end up with : 以..….结束

which 引导的句子为非限定性定从，先行词为 a small dish)

T: Let’s move to the third paragraph.

( It is polite to finish eating…When drinking to someone’s health, you raise your glasses, but the glasses should not touch.

When (you are ) drinking to someone’s health, you raise your glasses, but the glasses should not touch.如果when从句的主语与主句主语相同，谓语又是be动词，从句主语和be可以省略：当when从句主语与主句主语相同时，用when加分词可以替代状语从句。Eg: When（you are）in trouble, ask her for help.

When（I was）sleeping, I never heard a thing.raise vt. lower vt.to lift, push , or move upwardsPlease raise your hand.

She raised the window and let in the fresh air.

He raised his voice. rise vi. set / fallEveryone knows that the sun rises in the east.

After the terrible flood the water level in the river ______by 50 centimeters.

A. rises B. raises C.is rose D.is raisedWhen drinking to someone’s heath , … 为某人健康祝酒时，……drink to : 为 ……祝酒，为 ……干杯

eg : Let’s drink to the bride and groom . 为新郎新娘祝酒。

让我们为我们两国人民之间的友谊干杯!

Let’s drink to the friendship between our two countries! )

T: Ok. Let’s look at the last paragraph.

(screen: Table manners change over time . They follow the fashion of the day.

餐桌礼仪会随时间而改变。随时尚而改变Over : during , through a period

Over the years, he’s become lazier and lazier.

这些年来，他变得越来越懒惰了。fashion : 流行，时尚，方式

eg : a ~ show 时装表演 follow the ~ 赶时髦

be in the ~ 正在流行 out of the ~ 不流行，过时 )

make / leave a good /bad /poor impression on sb.

2. mean to do sth.

mean doing sth.

3. be close to

4 a little bit

5. start with 以..….开始

end up with 以..….结束

6. keep slient

7. at table 吃饭

at the table 坐在桌子旁边

8. all the time

9. drink to

Step 3 Word study: negative prefixes

T: Can you tell me the opposite of the following words.

(Bb: easy safe polite )

Ss:

T: Do you know another opposite of the words?

Ss:

T: Yes, we can say “uneasy, unsafe, impolite”. We add the prefixes “un--” and “im--” before the words. Now, can you tell me anything in common between the two prefixes?

Ss: I think the meaning of each prefix is “not”.

T: You are right. That is to say, w can add a certain negative prefix to a word to change the meaning of it to its opposite. Then, do you know any other negative prefixes like “un--” and “im--”?

Ss: “non-” and “in-”

(Bb: un-- im-- non-- in-- )

T: Well done. Now please turn to page 40 and look at the first part in Word Study. Look at the word formation rules first. Then finish the exercise below.

nonstop unfold incorrect importantunderstand invite unlucky impossible uniforminteresting )

(1 minute later,ask Ss to answer)

T: Ok, now ,let’s do an exerise.please open your book to Page117. Fill in the blanks with the words below. You may need to add a negative prefix to some of them to fit the contex.

polite formal possible certain known happy smoker stop able

1.The Oscar winner was almost _______ before the movie made her famous.

2.I would like to help you, but I am ______ to.

3.It is still ________ whether there will be a war between the two countries.

4.It is _________ to say that there is no life in outer space.

5.“It costs nothing to be _____ .” said Winston S. Churchill.

6.Is it ______ to get to the city by train, or should I take a bus?

7.She hates smoking, so her husband has to be a _________ .

8.This plane won’t take you to Shanghai. It flies _______ from Beijing to Shenzhen.

9.Children love to read fairy tales(童话), most of which have a _____ ending.

10. Business letters are usually _____ , but we write _______ letters to family or friends.)

T: First tell me the negative prefixes of the words.

Ss:

(2minutes later.ask Ss to answer it one by one )

Step 4Summary and Homework

Acticity1,Summary

T: Today we haven learned the language points. Please try to remember them and to use them. We also have learned the negative prefixes of the words.

Activity2 Homework

1.Preview grammar

2.P117 Exercise 3

3.同步练习：P41-43 Period 5 Grammar

Step1 Review the attributive clause

T:In last two units ,unit4 and unit 5, we have learned the attributive clause. Do you still remember?

Ss:

T: Ok. Before our class, we first review it . Please look at the screen.

(screen:

(explain the using indetails)

T: Ok. Now, let’s do some exerise to remember it. Look at the screen.

(scren: (1)The girl __________ is standing there is Mary.

(2)The man _________________________ my mother saw in the street is my teacher.

(3) The book ____________ tells us about the earth is interesting.

(4)She lives in a house _______________ windows face south.

(5) I won’t forget the factory __________________ my father worked.

(6) I won’t forget the factory _______________ I visited yesterday.

(7) I’ll never forget the day __________________ I joined the army.

(8)Tell me the reason ________________you came late.

(9)He talked about the teachers and schools __________ he had visited.

(10)Dinner starts with s small dish, __________ is often called a starter. )

Step 2 Lead-in

(show a picture of Wenzhou University)

I have visited the place.

The place is called Wenzhou University. )

(ask Ss to combine them)

T: Well done. Please look at the next two sentences, combine them.

(screen: Wenzhou University is very beautiful.I have visited Wenzhou University

(ask Ss to combine them)

T: Please look at the two sentences. Can you tell me the differences?

(screen: I have visited the place which is called Wenzhou University .

Restrictive Attributive Clause

限制性定语从句

Wenzhou University , which I have visited, is very beautiful.

Non-restrictive Attributive Clause

非限制性定语从句

Restrictive Attributive Clause and Non-restrictive Attributive Clause?

Ss:

T: Commas is one point. I show you some more.

(screen:

限制性定语从句

非限制性定语从句

从句与先行词的关系从句是先行词不可缺少的定语，如果省去，先行词的意思就会不完整或不明确。从句只是对先行词的附加说明，如果省去，先行词的意思仍然清楚或完整。

标点从句和主句之间不用逗号分开

从句和主句之间通常用逗号分开

关系代词指人 who(that)whom 指物 which(that)

指人和物的 whose关系代词在从句中作宾语时可以省略指人 who(作主语） whom（作宾语）指物 which

指人和物的 whose关系代词一般不可省略

翻译定语从句译在被修饰词的前面定语从句通常被译成另一个独立的句子

I know the man who is named David Beckham

我知道那个叫贝克汉姆的男人。I know David Beckham , who is a handsome man.

我知道贝克汉姆，他是一个很帅的人.

( explain the different pionts in the two sentences )

T: We can the differences between the two sentences.限制性定语从句在从句中起限定的作用，如果去掉了，对方回不知道你要讲什么，回产生歧义的。而非限制性定语从句在从句中起补充说明的作用，去掉了，也不会影响大局；也就是说对方仍能听明白你讲什么，可无可有的；从句还可以是其他方面的消息的。Now, look at the sentences on the screen.

(show two pictures of David Beckham )

T: 在非限制性从句中，只要我说了David Beckham，你们就知道是谁了，也明白了我意思。所以后面的信息是可有可无的。它只起补充说明的作用。

(screen:

I know David Beckham, whose nationality is Britain.

who is a handsome man.

whom I like best.

who is paid 3,000 a week at Manchester United.)

T:注意在非限制性定语从句中，作主语的用who，作宾语的只能用whom，不能用who。

T: Please look at the following sentences.

Wenzhou University , which I have visited, is very beautiful.

David Beckham is a famous football player, who is a handsome man.

My house, which I bought last year, has got a lovely garden.

当先行词是地名，人名等专有名词或物主代词修饰时，其后的定语从句通常是用非限制性的。

Activity2 , Do some exercise on Page41

T: First read the examples on your book. There are two sentences and one is the Restrictive Attributive Clause and the other is Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.

T: Are you clear how to do? Now, let’s do another two sentences.

(screen: 1.Paula lives alone on the fourth floor.2.My sister Ellen is a nurse. )

T: Please add some information in your own words.

(1 minute later, ask Ss to answer)

Acitivity3 Which & As

T: 我们说非限制性定语从句的关系代词which，可以指代前面的先行词（名词或代词），还可以指代前面的整个主句。For example: In China, you sometimes get a hot, damp cloth to clean your face and hands, which, however, is not the custom in Western countries. 在这句中，which就指代you sometimes get a hot, damp cloth to clean your face and hands,。而不是指代your face and hands。Do you understand?

Ss: Yes.

T: Ok. Let’s do some exerises.

(screen: 1.The result of the exam was very good,________ we hadn’t expected.

A. when B. that C. which D. who2.___________ is known to us all, the moon travels around the earth .

A. It B. As C. That D.Which

关系代词as和which都能引导非限制性定语从句代表整个句子内容，as引导的定语从句可位于句首或句末；which引导的定语从句却不能位于句首。For xeamples:

As is known to all, Taiwan is a part of China.

He was always late for school, which / as made his teacher angry.

Activity4, do a practice

Complete the sentences with who,whom or which.1.A young man, _________ I did not know,asked me to give you the message.

2.The Yangtze River,on ______another big dam will be built,is going to produce more electricity for the areas along it.

3.The man in the black coat, ______used to be our headmaster,has just come back from Pakistan.

4.The old tree in Jingshan Park, on______Emperor Chongzhen hanged himself, was cut down in the 1960’s.5.The Project Hope,______started many years ago,has helped a large number of children in poor areas go to school.

6.Those foreign teachers, most of ______have never been to China before,are enjoying their work here very much.

7.On the train from Baotou to Dalian we met a Japanese man,_____spoke Chinese very well.

8.The temple,______was built on the bank of the lake in 1456,was destroyed in an earthquake two years ago.

篇15：Unit 6 good manners Period 1(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

Unit 6 Good manners

Listening & Speaking

Teaching aims:

1. To get students to know about some expressions of apology.

2. To study the language points concerned with the dialogue.

Key and difficult points:

Teaching procedures:

Step 1 ------ Leading in (warming up)

1. Ask students to review how to apologize.

(1) Ask students when they do something wrong, what they should say.

(2) Ask students to make a list of the expressions of apology.

A. Excuse me.

B. I’m sorry.

2. Ask students to finish exercise on page 36.

Step 2 ------ Listening

1. Ask students to listen to the tape for main idea and answer the following

questions.

(1) Bill took Cliff’s bike without asking.

(2) Bill was sorry to lose Cliff’s bike.

2. Ask students to read exercise and listen to the tape as a second time.

3. Listen to the tape for the third time and check the answer.

Step 3 ------ Speaking

1. Ask students when Bill was sorry for his behavior, what did he say.

(1) I’m sorry.

(2) I really have to apologize.

(3) I’m really sorry about the bike.

2. Ask students when Cliff heard Bill’s apology, what did Cliff response?

(1) That’s OK.

(2) That’s all right.

(3) Forget it.

3. Learn more functional sentences.

A. When someone wants to apologize for what he has done.

(1) I’m sorry.

(2) I really have to apologize.

(3) I’m really/so/very/terribly sorry about/of …

(4) Forgive me (for sth).

(5) I apologize for …

(6) Please accept my apologies for …

(7) I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to …

(8) Oops. Sorry about that.

B. If someone heard one’s apologies, how to response.

(1) That’s OK.

(2) It’s OK.

(3) That’s all right.

(4) Forget it.

(5) Oh, well, that’s life.

(6) No problem.

(7) It doesn’t matter.

(8) Never mind.

4. Give students some situation to make a dialogue.

(1) An apology dialogue between students in our school cafeteria. One accidentally knocks over your noodles and spills some on your shirt.

(2) The final exam is upon you. You borrow your classmate’s notebook, but unluckily you lost it. And this note book is very important for your classmate. You have stayed out late with some friends. As soon as you return to

(3) You have stayed out late with some friends. As soon as you return to the dormitory, you realize that you have left your keys in your room and are locked out. You know your roommate goes to bed early every night. You knock at the door several times and he or she finally answers. He or she sounds sleepy and angry.

Homework ------

Preview new lesson

Self-evaluation ------

篇16：Unit 6 Good Manners word study(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

词语探究

manner, apologise, gratitude, introduce, forgive, impression, behave, unfold, however, follow, custom, spirit, provide, allow, do well in, damp, cloth, stare, leave out, disabled

句子分析

1. You are looking for two seats to sit down with your friend, but there are none.

2. Having good table manners means knowing, for example, how to use forks and knives, how to toast and how to behave at the table.

3. There are two pairs of large knives and forks on the table, forks on the left and knives on the right of the plate.

4. In China, you sometimes get a hot, damp cloth to clean your face and hands, which, however, is not the custom in Western countries.

5. At table, you should try to speak quietly and smile a lot, but do not laugh all the time.

6. When drinking to someone's health, you raise your glasses, but the glasses should not touch.

7. For drinking during a dinner, the best advice is never to drink too much.

8. Although good manners always make you look good, you do not need to worry about all these rules while having dinner with friends or family.

9. They make me think of the happy days we spent together.

10. At this moment I am very busy with my studies.

11．..., and now it is time for me to study hard.

12. I should like to invite you to come and visit me in the north of China over the next holiday in January.

口语交际

1. Ways of making apologies.

2. How about...?

3. I wish you all the best.

语法详释

定语从句(Ⅲ)

研究性学习

阅读解题指导(Ⅱ)

课文理解

Part One 词语探究

1. manner

(1)用作可数名词，意思是“方法”，“方式”，通常用单数形式。

e. g. I love duck cooked in Chinese manner.

我喜欢吃中国烧法的鸭子。

(2)用作可数名词，意思是“举止”，“态度”，常用单数形式。

e. g. I don't like his manner. It's too rude.

我不喜欢他的举止，太粗鲁了。

(3)用作复数形式，意思是“礼貌”，“规矩”。

e. g. It is bad manners to speak loudly in public.

在公共场合高声讲话是没礼貌的。

2．apologise

(1)用作不及物动词，也可拼写为 apologize, 意思是“道歉”。

常见词组：apotngise to sb. for sth. “为某事向某人道歉”。

e. g. He apologised to me for being late.

他因迟到向我道歉。

(2)apologise 的名词形式是 apology。用作可数名词，意思是“道歉”。

e. g. I must make an apology to him.

我必向他道歉。

please accept my apologies．

请接受我的歉意。

3．gratitude

用作名词，意思是“感恩，感谢”，通常用作不可数名词。

常见短语out of gratitude，意思是“出于感谢”。

express one's gratitude to sb．for sth.意思是“为某事对某人表示感谢”。

e．g．He expressed his gratitude to me for my help．

他为我对他的帮助表示感谢。

Out of gratitude，he invited me to dinner．

出于感激，他邀请我吃饭。

4．introduce

用作及物动词，意思是“介绍，引入”。

e．R．I introduced myself to them．

我向他们作了自我介绍。

His works began to be introduced into China forty years ago．

他的作品是40年前介绍给中国读者的。

[辨析]introduce...to...,introduce...into...

①introduce...to...把某人或某物介绍给某人

to 后面接人作介词宾语。

e．g．First I introduce myself to you all．

首先我向你们作自我介绍。

②introduce...into...把某物传入或引进某地方

into后面接地点作介词宾语。

e．g．Tobacco was introduced into Europe from America。

烟草是从美洲传入欧洲的。

5．forgive

用作及物动词，意思是“原谅，宽恕，饶恕”。

e．g．Will you forgive my mistake?

你能原谅我的过错吗?

[辨析]forgive，excuse，pardon

①forgive“原谅”，指宽恕他人对自己的冒犯。

②excuse“原谅”，指宽恕小的过失。

③pardon“原谅”，指宽恕严重的过失。

e．g．We must pardon him for his faults．

我们一定会原谅他的过失。

Excuse me for coming so late．

请原谅我来晚了。

We may forgive their mistakes．

我们会原谅他们的过失。

6．impression

(1)通常用作可数名词，意思是“印象，感想”，

e．g．He made a strong impression on (upon)us．

他给我们留下了深刻的印象。

(2)impression的动词是impress，意思是“留下印象”。常用短语impress sth. on (upon)sb．“某事给某人留下印象”。

e．g．What he did was greatly impressed on(upon)us．

他所做的一切给我们留下深深的印象。

The girl impressed her sense of humour on(upon)her friends．

这个女孩的幽默感给她的朋友留下深刻的印象。

7．behave

(1)用作动词，意思是“行为，举止，行为好”。

e．g．He behaves badly．

他行为坏。

(2)behave的名词是behavior，意思是“行为，举止，态度”。

e．g．The boy is always on his good behavior．

那个男孩一直举止规矩。

8．unfold

(1)用作动词，意思是“打开，摊开”。

e．g．The teacher unfolded the map and looked for the Great Wall．

老师摊开地图寻找万里长城。

(2)英语中前缀im-，non-，un-等表示否定含义，通常用在形容词或动词前面。

e．g．possible可能的→impossible不可能的

stop 停止→nonstop不停止

fit 胜任→unfit不胜任

fold 折叠→unfold展开，打开

9．however

(1)用作副词，意思是“可是，依然”。

e．g．I Would like to go with you，however I am very busy．

我很想和你一块儿去，可是我很忙。

(2)用作副词，意思是“无论如何，不管怎样”。

e．g．However cold it is，he likes swimming in winter．

不管天气多冷，他喜欢冬天游泳。

10．follow

用作动词，意思是“跟随，跟从，遵循，遵从，顺着……走”。

e．g．The boy followed his mother up the stairs．

那个男孩跟他母亲上了楼梯。

Follow my advice，please.

请听从我的劝告。

Follow this road to the stone bridge.

沿这条路走到石头桥去。

11．custom

用作名词，意思是“风俗，习俗”，“习惯”，“顾客”。

e．g．Social customs vary greatly from country to country．

各国的社会风俗大不相同。

The waiters are kind to the custom．

服务员对顾客友好。

[辨析]custom，habit，hobby

这三个词都有“习惯”的意思，但含义有一定的不同。

①custom通常指大范围、长时间形成的风俗和习惯。

②habit通常指个人短时间的习惯。

③hobby通常指“爱好”。

e．g．The Spring Festival is a custom in East Asia．

春节是东亚的一个风俗。

He formed a habit of getting up early．

他养成早起的习惯。

Reading is his hobby．

看书是他的爱好。

12．spirit

(1)作“精神，心灵”的意思讲时，通常用作不可数名词。

e．g．He was troubled in spirit．

他内心烦恼。

(2)用作复数形式，意思是“情绪”。

e．g．The soldiers are in high spirits．

战士们情绪高涨。

(3)用作可数名词，意思是“幽灵，妖精，灵魂”。

e．g．Some people think that the spirit lives on after death．

有些人相信死后灵魂继续存在。

13．provide

用作动词，意思是“提供，供给”，与supply同义。

常见短语：provide(supply)sth．to(for)sb．或provide(supply)sb．with sth．意思是“为某人提供某物”。

e．g．The school provides (supplies)food to(for)the students．

这所学校为学生提供食物。

14．allow

用作动词，意思是“允许，准许”，后面通常接动词-ing作宾语，或后接宾语和宾语补足语，宾语补足语通常由不定式充当。

e．g．They don't allow smoking here.

他们不允许在此地吸烟。

The teachers don't allow us to cheat in the exam．

老师不允许我们考试作弊。

[辨析]allow，permit，let

这三个词都可表示“允许”，但含义和用法上有一定区别。

①allow词义较弱，含有“听任，默许，不加阻止”的含义。

e．g．He allowed the dog to come in.

他听任狗进来。

②permit词义较强，强调“正式认可，批准”的含义。

e．g．The school doesn't permit the students to smoke．

学校严禁学生抽烟。

③let表示“让”，词义最弱，口语化，在let后面的宾语补足语常不带to，而且let-般不用于被动语态。

e．g．Let me go with you．

让我跟你一起去。

15．do well in

do well in的意思是“在……方面做得好”，well是副词。

e．g．He does well in maths．

他数学学得好。

16．damp

damp用作形容词，意思是“潮湿的”。

e．g．The place is too damp．

这个地方太潮湿。

17．cloth

(1)用作不可数名词，意思是“布，布料，织物”。

e．g．The girl wanted to buy a piece of cloth.

那个姑娘想买一块衣料。

(2)用作可数名词，意思是“一块布，台布，抹布”。

e．g．The waiter took off the table cloth.

服务生取下桌布。

18．stale

(1)用作动词，既可用作及物动词，也可用作不及物动词，意思是“盯，凝视”。

e．g．It is impolite to stare at other people．

盯着别人看是不礼貌的。

The teacher stared the whole class into silence．

老师盯着全班学生，使他们安静下来。

(2)用作名词，通常用作可数名词，意思是“盯，凝视”。

e．g．He gave me an icy stare．

他冷冰冰地盯了我一眼。

19．leave out

leave out的意思是“省去，遗漏，不考虑”。

e．g．You can leave out their plan.

你们能够不考虑他们的计划。

You shouldn't leave out this important detail in the trial．

在审判中，你不该漏掉这个重要细节。

20．disabled

disabled用作形容词，意思是“残疾的，伤残的”。

e．g．The disabled boy is kind to everyone．

那个残疾的孩子对大家友好。

Part Two句子分析

1．You are looking for two seats to sit down with your friend，but there are none．

你找两个座位和你朋友坐下来，但一个也没有。

none意思是“没有一个”，代替不可数名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式；代替可数名词作主语时，谓语动词可用单数，也可用复数。

e．g．None of them know(knows)the story．

他们没有一个知道这个故事。

None of the students are(is)afraid of difficulties．

没有一个学生害怕困难。

[辨析]none，no one，nothing

①none用于指人和物，可与of短语连用，用作单数和复数。

e．g．--“How many elephants did you see in the park?”

--“None．”

-你在公园里看到几头大象?

-一头也没看到。

②no one只能指人，不能与of连用，用作单数。

e．g．No one knows what they fought for．

没有人知道他们为什么发生战争。

③nothing用于指物，不与of连用，通常泛指“没有什么事情或东西”，用作单数。

e．g．Nothing can change the world．

什么也不能改变世界。

2．Having good table manners means knowing，for example，how to use forks and knives, how to toast and how to behave at the table．

有了餐桌上好的规矩就是说了解，比方说如何使用刀叉，如何敬酒和如何在餐桌上言谈。

(1)how to use forks...at the table，三个由“how+不定式”构成，作knowing的宾语。

e．g．I don't know what to do．

我不知道做什么。

(2)for example意思是“举例说明”，往往用逗号隔开。而且example前面不加冠词。

e．g．For example，John has the same idea．

比如约翰就有相同的看法。

3．There are two pairs of large knives and forks on the table，forks on the left and knives on the right of the plate.

桌子上有两副刀叉，叉子在盘子的左边，刀子在盘子的右边。

(1)There be...句型中的be用单数还是复数取决于第一个主语，若主语是单数，be用单数，若是复数，be用复数。

e．g．There is one chair and two tables in the room．

屋里有一把椅子和两张桌子。

There are two tables and one chair in the room．

屋里有两张桌子和一把椅子。

(2)apair of“一双，一对”的意思。

e．g．He bought a pair of shoes．

他买了一双鞋。

The girl has three pairs of trousers．

那个女孩有三条裤子。

(3)在英语中，表示“在左边，在右边”，通常用介词on。

e．g．He sat on the left，and she sat on the right．

他坐在左边，她坐在右边。

4．In China，you sometimes get a hot，damp cloth to clean your face and hands, which，however，is not the custom in western countries．

在中国，有时你弄一块热的、湿的毛巾来洗脸，洗手，然而这在西方国家不是一个习惯。

(1)cloth

用作不可数名词，意思是“布料，布”，用作可数名词，意思是“桌布，台布，揩布”。

e．g．Cover the table with a table cloth．

用一块桌布把桌子盖住。

The tailor needed a piece of cloth．

那位裁缝要一块布料。

(2)which，however，is not the custom in western countries，这里which引导的是一个非限制性定语从句，先行词是前面整个主句。

e．g．The bamboo is hollow，which makes them light.

竹子是空的，这使得竹子很轻。

Our class won the match，which made us happy．

我们班获胜，这使我们高兴。

[辨析]sometimes，sometime，some time

①sometimes副词，表示“有时候，不时”。

e．g．Sometimes he went to work by car and sometimes by train．

他有时坐汽车去上班，有时乘火车去。

Sometimes he is late for class．

他有时上课迟到。

②sometime副词，表示“曾经，某时，有朝一日”，常同过去时或将来时连用，表示过去或未来某一不肯定的时间。

e．g．It happened sometime 1ast year．

那是去年某一天发生的。

Will you come and see me sometime?

你哪一天来看看我好吗?

③some time名词词组，表示“一段时间”。

e．g．It will take me some time to read the novel．

读这本小说花了我一些时间。

There is some time left.

还剩一些时间。

5．At table，you should try to speak quietly and smile a lot，but do not laugh all the time．

就餐时，你应文静地讲话而且面带笑容，但不能一直笑过不停。

(1)at table意思是“就餐，吃饭”。

e．g．You shouldn't speak loudly at table.

吃饭时你不该高声讲话。

[辨析]at table，at the table

①at table表示“吃饭，就餐”。

②at the(a)table表示“在桌子旁”。

e．g．He sat at the table，reading a novel．

他坐在桌子旁，看小说。

It is bad manners to blow your nose at table．

进餐时擤鼻子是很不雅观的举止。

(2)all the time

all the time的意思是“始终，一直”。

e．g．The baby cried all the time．

婴儿哭个不停。

6．When drinking to someone's health，you raise your glasses，but the glasses should not touch．

在为某人健康干杯时，你举起杯子，但杯子不能碰撞。

(1)drink在此句中意思是“干杯”，通常与介词to连用。

e．g．Let's drink to the health of my teacher.

让我们为我的老师健康干杯。

(2)drink还有“饮，喝”，“举杯祝贺”的意思。

e．g．Let's drink beer together．

让我们一起喝啤酒。

They drank success to the professor．

他们举杯祝贺那位教授成功。

[辨析]raise，rise，lift

①raise用作及物动词，意思是“举起，抬起，抬高”，说明主语发出的动作是要作用于其它事物的。

②rise用作不及物动词，意思是“升起，上升，起立”，说明主语自身移向较高的位置。

③lift用力“举起”的含义。

e．g．Price has been raised up．

价格被提高了。

Price rises gradually．

价格渐渐地涨上去了。

The young lifted the stone at last．

那个年轻人终于举起那块石头。

7．For drinking during a dinner，the best advice is never to drink too much．

对于吃饭喝酒，最好的忠告是不要喝得太多。

(1)advice

用作不可数名词，意思是“建议，忠告”。

e．g．Marx gave some good advice on bow to learn a foreign language．

马克思对如何学习一门外语提出一些建议。

(2)too much

too much的意思是“过于，太多”，作定语，修饰不可数名词，还可单独使用作主语、表语，或状语。

e．g．He drank too much beer last night．

昨晚他啤酒过量了。

Don't smoke too much．

不要抽太多的烟。

[辨析]too much, much too

①too much既可作形容词，修饰不可数名词。也可作副词，修饰动词。

②much too用作副词，修饰形容词或副词。

e．g．The problem is much too difficult for me to work out．

这道题非常难，我算不出来。

The lady has too much money．

那位女士有很多钱。

8．Although good manners always make you look good，you do not need to worry about all these rules while having dinner with friends or family．

尽管有礼貌一直让你看起来出色，当你和你的朋友或家人吃饭时，你不必担心这些规则。

(1)although连词，“尽管”的意思，引导让步状语从句，不能和but连用。although

和but只能保留一个。

e．g．Although he is clever，he often makes mistakes．

尽管他聪明，但经常犯错误。

He is clever，but he often makes mistakes．

尽管他聪明，但经常犯错误。

(2)worry about表示“担心……”的意思。

e．g．My mother always worries about my health．

我母亲一直担心我的健康。

9．They make me think of the happy days we spent together．

他们使我想起我们在一起的日子。

(1)we spent together是一个定语从句，省略关系代词that或which，关系代词在定语从句中作宾语，通常省略，但which作介词宾语时，不能省略。

e．g．This is the place we visited last year．

这就是我们去年参观的地方。

This is the place in which we lived last year．

这就是我们去年住过的地方。

(2)think of意思是“想起”。

e．g．The film made him think of the children in the countryside．

这部电影使他想起农村的孩子。

10．At this moment l am very busy with my studies.

此时我忙于我的学习。

(1)at this moment意思是“此时，现在”。

英语中与moment构成的常见短语：

a moment ago刚才 at the moment此刻，那时 at any moment任何时刻 for the moment暂时，目前 in a moment立即，马上 just a moment稍等一下

(2)the moment相当于连词，意思是“一……就……”。

e．g．I'll write to you the moment I arrive．

我一到就写信给你们。

(3)busy

用作形容词，意思是“忙的，繁忙的”。

e．g．He is often busy with (at，about)his work．

他总是忙于工作。

The scientist is busy making the experiment.

那科学家正忙于做实验。

11．... and now it is time for me to study hard.

现在到了我认真学习的时候了。

(1)It is time for sb．to do sth.“到某人做某事的时候”。

e．g．It is time for us to do our homework．

到了我们做作业的时候了。

(2)It is time for sth．“到做某事时候了”。

e．g．It is time for class．

到上课时间了。

(3)It is time that...“到什么时候了”，that引导的从句谓语动词用过去时。

e．g．It is time that we went to school．

到我们上学的时候了。

(4)动词不定式的复合结构：

“for+名词或代词的宾格+动词不定式”这种结构称为动词不定式的复合结构。for后面的名词或代词形式上是for的宾语，而意义上是不定式的主语。这种不定式结构可在句子中作主语，宾语、表语、定语和状语。

e．g．It is honour for me to be asked to speak there．

我很荣幸地被邀到这里讲话。(作主语)

The first thing for them to do is to find out when the train starts．

他们要做的第一件事是要了解到开车的时间。(作定语)

The best thing would be for you to build a swimming pool with your own hands．

最好是你们自己动手修建游泳池。(作表语)

I don't think it difficult for us to finish it in time．

我认为我们及时完成这项工作并不困难。(作宾语)

He stepped aside for me to pass．

他站在一边让我过去。(作状语)

12．I should like to invite you to come and visit me in the north of China over the next holiday in January．

我希望能下一次一月休假时邀请你到华北来看望我。

(1)should like to do sth．

该句型意思是“希望，愿意做……”。

e．g．I should like to go with you.

我愿意和你一起去。

(2)in表示方位的用法

in一般表示在某一范围内。

e．g．Hubei lies in the middle of China.

湖北位于中国的中部。

[辨析]in，on，to表示方位的用法

①in表示“在……境内，在……范围之内”。

②on表示“两者交界”，还表示“在……河畔”。

③to表示“在……范围以外”，并不强调是否接壤。

e．g．Taiwan lies in the east of China.

台湾位于中国东部。

Japan lies to the east of China.

日本位于中国东部。

Jiangxi lies to(on)the east of Hubei.

江西在湖北东部。

Zhejiang lies to the east of Hubei.

浙江位于湖北东部。

(3)holiday

作用名词，意思是“假日，假期”。

e．g．He is still on holiday．

他还在度假。

Part Three 口语交际

1．Ways of making apologises.

在英语，表示道歉，通常可用以下句型：

(1)Forgive me. I'm very sorry．

原谅我，真抱歉。

(2)I apologise for...

因……我表示歉意。

(3)I'm sorry．I didn't mean to...

对不起，我意思不是……

(4)excuse me 对不起，用于打扰别人的情形。

(5)pardon对不起，用于希望对方重复一遍。

对别人表示歉意的回答是：

(1)That's all right．没关系。

(2)It doesn't matter．不要紧。

(3)That's nothing．没有什么。

(4)It really isn't worth mentioning．

那真是不值得一提。

(5)Don't think any more about it.

别再去想它了。

(6)No problem．没问题。

2．How about...?

How about...?或What about...?通常用来询问“……怎么样”，还可用于表示建议，意思是“如何”，或“……好吗?”

e．g．My book is very interesting．How(What)about yours?

我的书很有趣，你的呢?

What(How)about playing football?

踢足球好吗?

3．I wish you all the best．

祝你一切顺利。

这个句型是对他人的良好祝愿用语。

e．g．You have got the job in the company．I wish you all the best．

你已在这家公司谋得一职，祝你一切顺利。

Part Four语法详释

定语从句(Ⅲ)

5．限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句

(1)限制性定语从句对于主句里的名词或代词是必不可少的定语，如果把这个定语从句删掉，主句的意思就会不清楚。这种从句和主句之间不能用逗号分开。

e．g．My friend Carl will never forget the professor who taught him chemistry in the university．

我的朋友卡尔决不会忘记在大学里教过他化学的那位教授。

如果省略从句who taught him chemistry in the university，全句意思就不完整了。

(卡尔为什么不会忘记这位教授呢?就不清楚了。)

The woman who(that)came here yesterday has come again.

昨天来过的那个妇女又来了。

如果省去从句that came here yesterday，全句的意思就不清楚。(哪个妇女又来了?)

(2)非限制性定语从句对于它所修饰的那个先行词，通常只是一个附加说明，如果省略掉，主句的意思依然完整。朗读时要稍作停顿，并用逗号使它和主句分开。一般不能用关系代词that来引导非限制性定语从句。

e．g．Carl，who now holds an important position in a large chemical works，still remembers one afternoon in his first year when the professor took the students to the chemistry lab．

卡尔现在在一家大化工厂里担任重要任务，但至今仍然记得他在一年级时教授把他们这些学生带到实验室去的那个下午。

如果去掉who now holds an important position in a large chemical works这个从

句，整个句子的意思仍然完整。

Jack London，who was one of the famous American writers，lived a very adventurous life．

杰克伦敦过着非常冒险的生活，他是著名的美国作家之一。

如果去掉who was one of the famous American writers，其意义仍然完整。

Part Five研究性学习

阅读解题指导(Ⅱ)

3．逻辑推理

(1)根据常识，例如短文A。

Mr．Brown had been walking since ten in the morning，and now the sun was about to set．His shadow(影子)lay long ahead of him．He had to find a place for the night．

问题：Mr Brown was walking towards__________.

A．the north B．the south C．the east D．the west

解答此题除了要看懂英语句意外，还要根据常识来判断：Mr．Brown从上午十点上路走了一整天，这时太阳西下，他的长长的身影映在他的前面，只有当他面东而行才会有这种情况。因此答案C才符合他行走的方向。

(2)简单计算

做此类题的正确解答，除了懂英语外，还要进行倍数，和差，面积，体积，时间等简

单推算。例如短文B。

The doctor asked her some questions，and one of them was“How old are you?”“Well”，she answered，“I don't remember，doctor，but I'll try to think．”She thought for a minute and then said，“yes，I remember now，doctor! When I married，I was eighteen years old，and my husband was thirty．Now my husband is sixty．I know that is twice thirty．So I'm twice eighteen，that is thirty-six．Am I right?”

问题：How old was the woman?

She was really___________.

A．60 B．30 C．36 D．48

从短文中可以看出这位妇女结婚已三十年了，从她丈夫的年龄60-30=30得出，她本人现在应该是四十八，即30+18=48，因此正确答案为D。而如果根据这位妇女的荒谬可笑的推算，或者望文生义，就可能错选答案C。

(3)依据内容情节从一般规律、因果关系、转折关系推理。此类问题在解答各种阅读问题中屡见不鲜。如果只停留在对短文字面上的“阅读”，而不从人物、时间、情节发展上考虑其逻辑关系，并进行推理，是不可能真正地“理解”短文的。例如短文C。

Joe Bloggs always had a cigarette on his lips．He smoked while he read，while he looked at the television，and while he drank a cup of coffee．He smoked forty cigarettes a day，but he was happy．

Joe's friend, Fred Brown, said to him, ”It is very bad to smoke.“

When Joe heard this, he started to worry and became thin. So he did not buy any more cigarette. He became so thin and he went to Fred for help.

Fred said, ”You must eat more. “So Joe did not smoke, but he ate chocolate, and he became very fat. Again he went to Fred for help.

Fred said, ”You must not eat chocolate. "So Joe stopped eating chocolate, but he went back to smoking cigarettes. He became thin again but he was not happy, because he still smoked.

Sometimes Joe Bloggs wished Fred Brown was not his friend.

①When Joe became thin the first time it was because_________.

A. he smoked too much B. he worried too much

C. he stopped smoking D. he ate too little

②The following sentences tell what happened to Joe. Which is the right order of the events?

a. He did not smoke; he ate chocolate; he was fat; he was unhappy.

b. He smoked; he did not eat chocolate; he was thin; he was unhappy.

c. He smoked; he did not eat chocolate; he was not fat; he was happy.

A. a, b, c B. c, b, a C. b, a, c D. c, a, b

③what kind of person would you say Joe was?

A. He was not the kind of person who used his head much.

B. He had no will power to carry out a decision.

C. He was not happy to let others make decisions for him.

D. He was always changing his mind and was never satisfied.

④what is the writer trying to tell us with this story?

A. One should think and decide for oneself.

B. One should ask friends for help and advice.

C. Smoking is bad for ones health.

做第①题时，如果只看到“他每天抽两包烟”(He smoked forty cigarettes a day)，而没有看到“但是他很愉快”(but he was happy)，这一层转折关系，以及“他后来听了Fred的观点之后，忧心忡忡，面容憔悴起来”(when Joe heard this，he started to worry and became thin．)这一层因果关系，就有可能错选A答案，认为他的瘦削是由抽烟引起的。正确答案是C，则说明了他的瘦削的真正原因是忧虑所致。

第②题正确答案为D，语序“他抽烟，不吃巧克力，且不胖，但很愉快。”“他不抽烟，吃巧克力，胖，不高兴。”他抽烟，不吃巧克力，瘦，不高兴。”这正反映本文开始阶段情节发展的主线的逻辑关系。

第③题正确答案为A，从全文分析可以推理出Joe不是一个爱动脑筋的人。

4．把握作者态度。

如例文C中的第④小题What is the writer trying to tell us with this story?这就直接需要在阅读此短文时掌握作者的态度。

作者在这里并非强调抽烟或吃巧克力有害健康，而主要暗指Joe没有主见，决定事情总是要went to Fred for help，而且全听Fred的，结果烟未戒掉，面容憔悴，思想又不愉快，便更不如以前，虽然抽烟厉害，but he was happy了。因此，作者想要告诉读者的是一个人要自己拿主见，即答案是A。

如果在阅读中没有把握作者的基本态度或意图，往往就是“读懂了”短文也可能在做理解题上出现判断错误。因此，没有把握作者的态度，意图，倾向，就不能说真正读懂了。

篇17：Unit 6 good manners Period 3(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

Unit 6 Good manners

Word Study

Teaching aims:

1. To consolidate the words and useful expressions learnt in this unit.

2. To help the students use the key words and phrases with proficiently.

Key and difficult points:

To make the students know the usage of the key words and phrases.

Teaching procedures:

1. introduce

TS: You asked him to introduce you to the man.

v. ------ to make persons known by name to one another

I. introduce sb. to sb.

(1) I want to introduce my friend Jane (to you).

(2) Let me introduce my teacher to you.

II. introduce oneself to sb.

(1) May I introduce myself to you.

(2) Mr. Li introduced himself to us.

III. introduce sb. to sth.

(1) My classmates introduced me to the pleasure on the Internet.

(2) He introduced me to football.

IV. introduce sth (in/into sth)

(1) It is necessary to introduce advanced technology.

(2) Computers were introduced into some schools for teaching.

n. ------ introduction

(1) make an introduction

(2) When I had the first lecture, I made an introduction.

2 apologize (Bre apologise)

TS: What does Bill say to apologize for taking the bike without telling Cliff?

v. ------ to make excuse for or regretful acknowledgment of a fault or offense

for sth.

apologize for doing sth.

for what clause

(1) He apologized for his mistake.

(2) I apologized to her for stepping on her foot.

(3) You should apologize to the teacher for being late.

(4) Please allow me to apologize for what I have done.

n. ------ apology make an apology to sb. for sth.

(1) I made an apology to him for my fault.

3. forgive (forgave; forgiven)

TS: Forgive me. I’m very sorry.

vt. ------ to excuse for a fault or an offense; pardon

(1) Please forgive me -- I didn't mean to be rude.

(2) They forgave his mistake.

(3) You’re forgiven.

(4) My advice is that it's best to forgive and forget.

4. manners

manners (plural) polite ways of behaving in social situation礼貌；礼节

(1) She has such good manners.

(2) Some people have no manners.

(3) It is bad manners to talk with a full mouth.

manner (singular)

I. a way of doing something (= way)

(1) Tom has a strange manner of deciding things.

(2) “You should do your math homework in this manner.” Miss Zhang said.

(3) Why are you talking in such a strange manner?

II. a way of acting 举止或行为

(1) He had an absent-minded manner.

(2) He had a rather cold and unfriendly manner.

(3) As soon as the salesman realized that we weren’t going to buy anything, his whole manner changed.

5. mean

TS: Having good table manners means knowing when to drink a toast.

v. ------ to express or represent (an idea, thought, fact, etc)

I. 意思

(1) What does this word mean?

(2) What do you mean by that remark?

(3) I mean that they are good at singing and dancing.

(4) Love means never having to say you’re sorry.

II. mean to do sth.(打算做) & mean doing sth.(意味着)

(1) I meant to call on you, but I was too busy yesterday.

(2) I didn’t mean to interrupt your meal.

(3) What you’ve done means helping us a lot.

n. ------ meaning

(1) Please tell us the meaning of this word.

n. ------ means by means of 用, 以, 通过

(1) He does well in exam by means of cheating.

6. behave n. ------ behavior

TS: When to drink a toast and how to behave at a table.

I. act, bear oneself

(1) He always behaves well in class.

(2) She behaves more like a friend than a mother.

II. conduct oneself well, do what is right

(1) Children, please behave (yourselves).

(2) They got warning to behave.

III. machine works well

(1) How is your new car behaving?

7. start with (= begin with)

TS: Dinner starts with a small dish.

I. 以…开始

(1) Our group had five members to start with.

(2) Knowledge starts with practice.

(3) Let’s start our lesson with new words.

II. 首先、第一点

(1) We are not going on holiday this year, to start with we haven’t enough money and then there is still a lot we need to do on the house.

(2) I can’t come, to start with my car is being repaired, but I have also got another meeting that day.

8. raise

TS: When drinking to someone’s health, we raise our glasses.

vt. ------ to move to a higher position; elevate抬高；举起；增加

(1) He raised his arms above his head.

(2) I will not raise a hand against you.

(3) He raised his eyes from newspaper when she came in.

(4) The workers forced their boss to raise their salaries.

raise & rise

(1) The sun rises in the east.

(2) He rose from the chair and went out of the room.

(3) When he has question to ask, he’ll raise his hand.

(4) Please raise your voice, I cannot hear you clearly.

9. mix

TS: Rice should not be mixed with other food.

vt. ------ of different things, people bring or come together and combine 混合

(1) Oil and water do not mix.

(2) I mixed milk, coffee and sugar together.

II. mix sth. with sth. 把… 与… 混在一起

(1) We should mix business with pleasure.

III. mix sb. sth. = mix sth. for sb. 为某人调制

(1) She mixed me a white coffee.

(2) His wife mixed a hot drink for him.

IV. mix up弄错; 弄乱

(1) It's common to mix him up with his brother; they're twin brothers.

(2) Don't mix up those papers.

(3) If you mix up those data we shan't find the one we need quickly.

n. ------ mixture

(1) Air is a mixture of gases.

10. serve

TS: It is a custom in China to have some tea or other drinks before the meal is served.

I. serve sb (with sth) 将(饭菜)端上桌

(1) Have all the guests been served with food and drink?

(2) Four waiters served lunch for us.

II. 供职,服役

(1) He has served as a naval officer during the war.

(2) He has served his country well.

III. serve (sb) as sth. 为某人工作,(尤指)当用人

(1) He served as a gardener driver.

(2) He has served his master for many years.

11. impression

TS: Knowing them will help you make a good impression.

I. 印象

(1) The speech made me a strong/deep impression on the House.

(2) What were your first impressions of London?

v. ------ impress

给予强烈影响，使留深刻印象，使铭记

have a strong influence on, fix deeply (on the mind, memory)

(1) His words are strongly impressed on my memory.

(2) The book did not impress me at all.

(3) He impressed me unfavorably.

(4) She impressed me with her long hair.

12. advice

TS: For drinking during the dinner, the best advice is never to drink too much.

I. follow/take one’s advice

II. some/much/ a piece of, three pieces of advice

III. Can you give us some advices on how to improve our English?

v. ------ advise

I. advise sb to do sth

II. advise doing

III. advise that sb (should) do

(1) I advise you to get up early.

(2) I advise getting up early.

(3) I advised that you (should) get up early.

1. Jack advised ____ early.

A. leaving B. to leave C. left D. leave

2. We advised Lucy _____ a rest.

A. to have B. having C. have D. had

3. I advise that he _____ hard.

A. studied B. studies C. study D. has studied

4. We advised that he _____ basketball.

A. not play B. didn’t play

C. hadn’t play D. doesn’t play

篇18：学习手册Unit2 English around the world(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

make yourself at home；the majority of；total；have a good knowledge of；come about；while；have difficulty in doing sth.；bring in；a great many

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

Did you have a good flight?

You must be very tired.

Just make yourself at home.

Can you tell me how to pronounce …?

Get it.

Ⅲ.语法

直接引语与间接引语（2）

●学习障碍

Ⅰ.单词及短语

for the first time；What is it that…?at all；make yourself at home；the majority of；total；except for；come about；while；just as；end up with；have difficulty (in) doing…；bring in；a great many Ⅱ.语法

直接引语与间接引语（2）

直接引语为祈使句变间接引语的方法

●学习策略

Ⅰ.单词及短语部分

1.for the first time 第一次

横向比较法：

(1) for the first time 第一次，后面不加从句，在句中作状语

They came to Beijing for the first time.

(2)the first time 名词短语，在从句中充当连词，后接从句，不接that，when等连词。有同样用法的短语还有：

every time；next time；the last time

They liked Beijing the first time they went there.

(3) It's the first time that + 从句（用现在完成时）这是……的第一次

联系语境法：

用time的短语填空：

(1)________ that I have ever been abroad at all.

(2) They loved each other ________ they met.

(3) They were there ________.

答案：（1）It's the first time (2) the first time (3) for the first time

2.What is it that…?

强调句的用法：

(1)结构：It is /It was（过去时间）+被强调部分+that/who（专指人）+其他部分

(2)用法：除了谓语动词不能强调，句子的每部分均可强调。

Jim met the student in the street last week.

主语宾语地点状语时间状语

强调主语：It was Jim who/that met the student in the street last week.

强调宾语：It was the student whom/that Jim met in the street last week.

强调地点状语：It was in the street that Jim met the student last week.

强调时间状语:It was last week that Jim met the student in the street.

(3)注意点：

一般疑问句的强调句：

Was it Dr Wang who spoke to you just now？

特殊疑问句的强调句：

Who is it that will visit our class?

Where is it that he has gone?

When was it that she went?

not…until…用于强调句:

It was not until then that I realized I was wrong.

综合运用法：

It was not until she had arrived home ________ she remembered ________ the key in the office.

A.when；to leave B.and；leaving

C.that；leaving D.that；to leave

答案：C 本题为强调句与remember doing sth.句型的综合运用。

3.at all

纵向归纳法:

（1）用在肯定句中，“竟然”

I'm surprised that you came at all.

（2）用在否定句，“一点也不”

There was nothing to worry about at all.

（3）用在疑问句中，“到底”

Have you been there at all?

（4）用在条件句中，“真的，确实”

If you do it at all,do it well.

横向比较法:

at all；in all；after all；first of all；above all

（1）at all用法见at all“纵向归纳法”

（2）in all=altogether

总共There are ten students in all.

（3）after all毕竟

Don't scold him.After all,he's only a child of six.

（4）first of all首先（强调顺序）

We should do several things.But first of all,we must take these magazines to Mary.

（5）above all最主要的

Children read many things；but above all they need love.

综合运用法：

In order to continue to learn by ourselves when we have left school,we must ________ learn how to study in the school now.

A.in all B.after all

C.above all D.at all

答案： C

4.make yourself at home 别拘束

横向比较法：

（1）make yourself at home别拘束（做客时的委婉语）

-Good evening,Jim.

-Good evening,Mary.Come in and make yourself at home.

（2）（all） by oneself 独自（没有别人帮助）

You can't possibly do it all by yourself.

（3）enjoy oneself=have a good time 玩的高兴

（4）for oneself 亲自；为自己

The student wants to think it for himself.

One should not live for oneself alone.

（5）of oneself 自动地The door closed of itself suddenly.

（6）be oneself （身体或情绪好）I am not myself today.

（7）help oneself to +n/pron.随便……

（8）in oneself 本身

This is not a bad idea in itself.

（9）come to oneself苏醒

（10）between ourselves 私下说的话

All this is between ourselves.

联系语境法：

用恰当的介词或动词填空

（1）They made the machine all ________themselves.

（2）You'll have to judge (判断) ________ yourself.

（3）Please ________ yourself to some fish.

（4）Please ________ yourself at the party and ________ yourself at home.

答案：（1）by （2）for （3）help （4）enjoy；make

5.the majority of… ……的大多数

纵向归纳法：

(1)the majority of +名词复数，作主语时，谓语动词用复数形式或单数形式。

The majority of people seem to prefer watching games to playing games.

(2)a majority of+名词复数，……的多数

She won the election by a majority of 900 votes.

综合运用法：

A few people were killed in the fire,but ________ were saved.

A.the most B.most of whom

C.the majority D.the majority of whom

答案: C 本题为并列句与the majority of … 短语的综合运用。

6.total n./adj.全部（的）

(1) in total 加起来

In total,there must have been 0 people there.

(2) a total of总共

His expenses(支出)reached a total of $100.

(3) the total of… ……的总数

The total of the bill is 230 dollars.

联系语境法：

改错：The total of 20000 visited the castle(城堡) on the first day.

答案：将The改为A

7.except for…除了……

横向比较法：

表示除了的词或短语有：except ；but；except for；besides等。

（1）except除……之外，有排他性，在否定句中可以由but替代。

All are here except Jim.（排除Jim）

（2）besides除……之外，还……。有附加性。

What other languages do you know besides English?(English 与other languages都属于know之中)

除英语外还懂哪种外语?

（3）except for… 只不过……，整体肯定，部分修正，for后连接部分在意义上包含在前者之中

Your article is well written except for a few spelling mistakes.(spelling mistakes 包含于article之中)

（4）except that+从句，意义与except for相同。

Your article is well written except that there are a few spelling mistakes.

（5）except when/what等+从句。

He is never late except when something happens unexpectedly .

联系语境法：

（1）I know nothing about the actress except ________ I read in the newspaper.

（2）He never comes late except ________ there is heavy traffic.

答案：（1）what (2) when

8.come about发生；造成

How did the accident come about?

（1）come across…=meet with…=run into… 偶然遇到

（2）come along 跟着去，快点

（3）come around 到来

（4）come at 向……扑去

（5）come back 回来

（6）come down 下来；降价

（7）come into being 形成；产生

（8）come into effect 开始生效

（9）come into power 开始执政

（10）come off 脱落

（11）come on 加油

（12）come out发芽；开花

（13）come to 来到；谈到；总计；苏醒；得出

（14）come up 走过来；长出来

联系语境法：

The student of English wants to know how the differences between British English and American English ________.

A.come into B.come out

C.come about D.come over

答案:C

9.while conj.オ

纵向归纳法：

（1）while 从属连词，引导时间状语从句，从句动词用延续性动词，主句的动词发生在从句之中。

Come on,get these things away while I make the tea.

（2）并列连词表前后两个分句意义相反或相对“然而”。

I like tea while she likes coffee.

Some people waste food while others haven't enough.

（3）尽管；虽然，放在句首。

While we don't agree,we continue to be friendly.

综合运用法：

Mother is cooking________father is reading newspapers.

A.when B.while

C.why D.however

答案：B

10.just as… 就像……

横向比较法：

（1）just as…,as为连词；加介词短语或从句

He came here on time just as he was expected.

Football is popular in China just as in Italy.

(2)just like…+n./pron.

He teaches me everything just like my lifetime teacher.

联系语境法：

用like或as填空

The house is just ________ it was in Shakespeare's time.

答案：as，后接从句。

11.end up with… 以……结束

横向比较法：

end up with +n.以……结束

The party ended up with the singing of Auld Lang Syne.

（2）end up as…最后成为……

He will end up as a president some day.

（3）end up+地点状语最后（有……结局）

If you drive your car like that,you'll end (up) in hospital.

联系语境法:

We ended the dinner up ________ fruit and coffee.

A.in B.to C.off D.with

答案：D

12.have difficulty in +动名词做……有困难

纵向归纳法:

（1）have difficulty：difficulty 是不可数名词，前可由little；no；much；a lot of；any修饰

(2)have difficulty(in)+ 动名词，in可以省略；很费劲……

We had a lot of difficulty in finding your house.

(3) have difficulty with +n./pron. 有……的困难

Do you have any difficulty with your English?

注意：trouble n.麻烦。difficulty 用法类似。

13. bring in

纵向归纳法:

(1)bring in 赢利，赚钱

The boys are bringing in￥60 a week.

(2)bring in 引进

Some new equipment has been brought in since last year.

14.a great many 许多

纵向归纳法:

(1) a great many +名词复数，中间无“of”。

A great many people have seen the film.

(2) a great many + of+the/these/those/one's +名词复数

A great many of the people have seen the film.

综合运用法：

改错:

A great many of workers lost their jobs.

答案: 去掉of

Ⅱ.语法部分

直接引语为祈使句变间接引语的方法

转述祈使句时，要将祈使句的动词原形变为带“to”的不定式，并在不定式的前面根据句子的意思加上“tell， ask,order”等动词，如果祈使句为否定式，在不定式的前面加“not”。 She said to us,“Please sit down.”→She asked us to sit down.

He said to him,“Go away.”→He ordered him to go away.

Mother said to me,“Come back before 10:00.”→Mother told me to come back before 10:00. He said,”Don't make so much noise,boys.”→He told the boys not to make so much noise.

●方法实践

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.Well known for his expert advice,he was able to help a ________ of people with their personal affairs.

A.dozen B.great deal

C.many D.number

2.________ total of the workers here ________200.

A.A；is B.A；are

C.The；is D.The；are

3.No one can imagine the difficulty I have ________ your home.

A.with B.to find

C.finding D.with finding

4.The speech ________ a famous poem.

A.ended up with B.broke in with

C.came with with D.turned up with

5.Without your help,we ________ the problem.

A.took trouble in solving

B.had much trouble to solving

C.kept difficulty to solve

D.would have had much trouble solving

6.________ of money has been spent on research.

A.A great many B.A great number

C.A great amount D.A good many

7.It was here ________ I first met him.

A.where B.that

C .in which D.what

8.Which of the following sentences is right?

A.How do you know the accident happened?

B.How do you believe did the accident take place?

C.How do you guess the accident brought about?

D.How do you think the accident came about?

9.Every time she went there,she would take with her ________ food.

A.a good many B.a great many

C.plenty of D.a large number of

10.Travellers from many parts of the world have ________ something new to our country.

A.brought in B.brought out

C.introduced in D.come about

11.In order to continue to learn by ourselves when we have left school,we must ________ study how to learn in the school now.

A.in all B.after all

C.above all D.at all

12.-I'm sorry I didn't do a good job.

-Never mind.________,you have tried your best.

A.Above all B.In all

C.At all D.After all

13.I know nothing about the young lady ________she is from Beijing.

A.except B.except for

C.except that D.besides

14.There are many sports lovers in his office.Some love climbing,________ others enjoy swimming.

A.while B.when

C.but D.so

15.She knew nothing about his journey ________ he was likely to be away for three months.

A.except B.except for C.except that D.in addition

16.Mr Mike didn't understand ________ made his wife so upset this morning.

A.what was it B.why it was this

C.how that was D.what it was that

17.-How did you find him out?

-I ________ his name by chance on the list.

A.came down B.came about

C.came up D.came across

18.Who ________ you that two American Airlines planes ploughed into the twin towers of the World Trade Center?

A.was it to tell B.was that told

C.was it that told D.did it tell

19.This suit fitted him well ________ the colour was a little brighter.

A.except for B.except that

C.except when D.besides

20.He has done everything ________ what I asked him to do.

A.beside B.besides

C.except D.accept

21.It was for this reason ________ her uncle moved out of New York and settled down in a small village.

A.which B.why

C.that D.how

22.-Do you know our town at all?

-No,this is the first time I ________ here.

A.was B.have been

C.came D.am coming

23.Was it in this place ________ the last Emperor died?

A.that B.in which

C.in where D.which

24.It is the ability to do the job ________ matters not where you come from or what you are. A.one B.that

C.what D.it

25.Many people agree that ________ knowledge of English is a must in ________ international trade today.

A.a；the B.the；an

C.the；the D./；the

Ⅱ.完形填空

The Depression(萧条)didn't make much change in my grandparents' lives.But it did bring an unending flow of men out of 1 ,drifting(being carried)from job to job,to the farm.The 2 to show up at the door of the kitchen was a man in rags.He quickly 3 that he hadn't eaten for a while.Grandpa stood watching him a 4 ,then said,“There's a stack(堆，垛）of firewood against the fence behind the barn（谷仓).I've been 5 to get it moved to the other side of the fence.You have just about 6 time to finish the job before lunch.”

Grandma said a 7 thing happened.The man got a 8 in his eyes and he hurried to the barn at once.She 9 another place at the table and made an apple pie.During lunch,the stranger didn't 10 much,but when he left,his 11 straightened.!Nothing ruins a man like 12 himself-respect,”Grandpa later told me.

Soon after,another man 13 up asking for a meal.This one was dressed 14 a suit and carried a small suitcase.Grandpa came out,looked at the man and offered a 15 .!There is a stack of firewood along the fence down the barn.I've been meaning to get it moved.It'd sure be a 16 to me.And we'd be pleased to have you 17 for lunch.

The fellow set his suitcase 18 and neatly laid his coat on top.Then he set 19 to work.

Grandma says she doesn't remember how many strangers they 20 a meal with during those Depression days-or how many times that stack of firewood got moved.

1.A.life B.business

C.farming D.work

2.A.guest B.first

C.second D.next

3.A.explained B.spoke

C.described D.talked

4.A.glance B.little

C.bit D.look

5.A.dreaming B.meaning

C.wishing D.hoping

6.A.some B.full

C.much D.enough

7.A.fearing B.funny

C.serious D.surprising

8.A.light B.flame

C.shine D.fire

9.A.put B.took

C.set D.sat

10.A.say B.drink

C.eat D.have

11.A.shoulders B.arms

C.feet D.hands

12.A.throwing B.losing

C.hurting D.protecting

13.A.went B.appeared

C.came D.showed

14.A.up B.in

C.with D.by

15.A.smile B.wave

C.nod D.handshake

16.A.favour B.offer

C.help D.wonder

17.A.stay B.remain

C.honour D.wait

18.A.away B.aside

C.along D.around

19.A.for B.off

C.of D.upon

20.A.spared B.supplied

C.supported D.shared

Ⅲ.短文改错

Dear Peter,

Thanks very much on inviting me to your birthday 1.________

party on Sunday. I'd like very much come but 2.________

I had an examination on Monday morning. It is 3.________

a very important exam but I can't afford to 4.________

fail it. I'll spend all the whole weekend reading 5.________

and prepare for it. So I'm really sorry that 6.________

I won't be able to come in this time. Hope you 7.________

can understand. I'll take this chance to wish 8.________

you wonderful time on your birthday. Happy 9.________

birthday, Peter, and many happy return of the day! 10.________Yours,

Li Ming

Ⅳ.书面表达

最近，你校同学正在参加某英文报社组织的一场讨论。讨论的主题是：公园要不要收门票？请你根据下表所提供的信息，给报社写一封信，客观地介绍讨论情况。

60%的同学认为： 40%的同学认为：

1.不应收门票

2.公园是公众休闲的地方

3.如收门票，需建大门、围墙、会影响城市形象 1.应收门票，票价不宜高

2.支付园林工人工资

3.购新花木

注意：1.信的开头已为你写好。

2.词数：100左右。

3.参考词汇：门票： entrance fee

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习(直接引语与间接引语之间的转换)

(Ⅰ)将下列句子由直接引语变为间接引语，每空一词。

1.“Please explain why you're one and a half hours late,” the boss said.

The boss told him ________ ________ why ________ ________ one and a half hours late.

2.“Don't spend all your money on food and drinks!” he said.

He told her ________ ________ spend all ________ money on food and drinks.

3.“Go to bed and don't get up till you are called.” his father ordered.

His father ordered him ________ go to bed and ________ ________ get up till ________ ________called.

4.“Don't pass until the green light is on,” the policeman said to him.

The policeman ________ him ________ ________ pass until the green light ________ on.

5.“Let me stay up a little longer tonight,” the little girl said to her mother.

The little girl ________ her mother ________ let ________ stay up a little longer ________ ________.

6.I said,“Let's go to the cinema.”

I ________ my mother ________ let ________ ________go to the cinema.

7.“Will you please pass me that book?” he asked.

He asked ________ ________ I ________ pass ________ that book.

8.“Why don't you go with us?” he asked.

He asked me ________ ________ go with ________.

9.“Don't be afraid,” Tom said to Dick.

Tom ________ Dick ________ ________ be afraid.

10.“Stop the thief!” the police officer said to his men.

The police officer ________ his men ________ stop the thief.

(Ⅱ)把下列句子变成直接引语,每空一词。

1.The teacher told him to go to her office at once.

The teacher said to him,“ ________to ________ office at once!”

2.Mother asked the police officer to show her the way to the hospital.

Mother asked the police officer,“________ show ________ the way to the hospital.”

3.Napolean(拿破仑) ordered his man to climb the mountain the next day.

Napolean ordered his man,“________ the mountain ________.”

4.The doctor told him not to smoke any more.

The doctor ________,“________ smoke any more.”

5.The young man asked his boss to let him go home earlier that day.

The young man asked his boss,“________ ________ go home earlier ________,________.” 6.The teacher didn't allow us to smoke in the library.

The teacher ________,“________ smoke in the library.”

7.I advised him to go over the textbook carefully.

I ________ to him,“________ ________ go over the textbook carefully.”

8.He asked us to pay attention to our pronunciation.

He said,“________attention to ________ pronunciation,________.”

9.The boy asked the doctor to look him over.

The boy ________to the doctor,“look ________ over,________.”

10.The old woman asked her daughter to cook dinner for her.

The old woman asked,“Cook dinner for ________!”

参考答案

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.D a dozen+名词。复数;不加of;a great deal of+不可数名词;a number of若干。

2.C a total of… ……的总数是……;v.用单数。

3.C have difficulty (in) doing sth.在做……上有困难。

4.A end up with以……结束。

5.D take trouble to do sth.不辞劳苦做……have trouble (in) doing sth.做……有麻烦。

6.C a great/good many of +the/these/those +名词复数;或a great/good many +名词复数;a great amount of +不可数名词。

7.B 强调句;强调地点状语here。

8.A

9.C plenty of 既可修饰可数名词n.;又可修饰不可数名词。

10.A 引进;介绍。

11.C 首先;尤其重要的是。

12.D 毕竟。

13.C 接从句。

14.A 然而;but转折,语气太硬。

15.C

16.D 宾语从句用陈述句语序。

17.D 遇到。

18.C 强调特殊疑问词who。

19.B 20.C

21.C 强调句。

22.B 时态呼应。

23.A 24.B

25.A a knowledge of… 固定搭配。

Ⅱ.完形填空

1.D 失业。

2.B 来到农场的第一个人。

3.A

4.C a bit一点儿。

5.B

6.D

7.D 令人惊讶的事情。

8.B flame in ones eyes 眼里冒着怒火。

9.C 安置。

10.A 话语不多。

11.A

12.B 失去自尊。

13.D 出现

14.B be dressed in穿着……

15.D

16.C 帮忙。

17.A 留下来吃午饭。

18.B set sth.aside把……放到一边。

19.B set off 动身。

20.D share sth.with sb.和……分享

Ⅲ.短文改错

1.on→for 2.come前加to 3.had→have 4.but→and/so 5.去掉all 6.prepare→preparing 7.去掉in 8.√ 9.wonderful前加a 10.return→returns

Ⅳ.书面表达

Dear Editor,

I'm writing to tell you about the discussion we've had about whether an entrance fee should be charged for parks.

Opinions are divided on the question. 60% of the students are against the idea of entrance fees. They believe a public park should be free of charge. People need a place where they can rest and enjoy themselves. Charging entrance fees will no doubt keep some people away. What is more, it will become necessary to build gates and walls, which will do harm to the appearance of a city.

On the other hand, 40% think that fees should be charged because you need money to pay gardeners and other workers, and to buy plants and young trees. They suggest, however, fees should be charged low.

Yours truly,

Li Hua

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习

(Ⅰ)1.to explain;he was 2.not to;her 3.to;not to;her was 4.told;not to;was 5.asked;to;her;that night 6.asked;to;with me 7.me if;would;him 8.why not;him 9.told;not to 10.ordered;to

(Ⅱ)1.come;my 2.please;me 3.climb;tomorrow 4.said;Don't 5.Let me;today;please 6.said;Don't 7.said;You'd better 8.Pay;your,please 9.said;me;please 10.me

篇19：学习手册Unit10 The world around us(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

cut down;fur;endanger;die out;harm;live a…life;take measure;adapt to;by doing sth.;make a list of;pick up;devote to;explain;in the wild;nature;be careful with;the causes and effects

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

Why is it important to do…?

What can we do to…?

Do you know of…?

Ⅲ.语法

直接引语与间接引语的复习。

●学习障碍

单词及短语

cut down;die out;get started;endanger;live a…life;harm;adapt to;devote to;explain;be careful with;nature

●学习策略

1.die out灭绝

横向比较法：

(1)die out绝种;熄灭

Many animals have died out now.

The fire died out.

(2)die down平息;静下来

The wind has died down a bit.

(3)die away逐渐消逝

At last the music died away，neither of them moved for a while.

2.get started

横向比较法：

(1)get +过去分词,表示被动

get married结婚

get excited兴奋

get hurt受伤

get hit被撞

get discouraged泄气

get drunk喝醉

get bored厌倦

get paid被付钱

(2)get +现在分词，“开始做某事”

We'd better get moving.

We must get going.

联系语境法：

用动词的适当形式填空:

(1)We found it hard to get________(start).

(2)We got________(talk)and didn't notice the time.

答案:1.started 2.talking

3.endanger vt.危害

横向比较法：

(1)endanger危害;使……有危险

He endangered our lives by setting fire to the house.

(2)danger n.危险

in danger处于危险之中

Our lives are in danger.

(3)dangerous adj.危险的(指主语对别人造成威胁)

The murderer was very dangerous.

联系语境法：

用in danger，dangerous，endanger填空:

(1)You'll ________ your health if you work so hard.

(2)Be careful! The tiger is ________.

(3)The tiger is now ________because it is being killed by people.

答案:(1)endanger(2)dangerous(3)in danger

4.live a …life过着一种……的生活

纵向归纳法：

live a happy life 过着快乐的生活

live a bitter life 过着痛苦的生活

live a simple life 过着简朴的生活

live the rest of one's life=live the last part of one's life度过某人的余生

live an active life 过着活跃的生活

live可以用lead代替

横向比较法：

在live a…life中,life是live的宾语,同时又是它的同根名词,这样的宾语叫同源宾语,类似带同源宾语的词组还有:

dream a sweet dream 做个美梦

fight a street fight 打一场巷战

die a heroic death英勇就义

sleep a sound sleep睡得很沉

综合运用法：

The________he lived was hard to imagine.

A.live thatB.lives that

C.lives whichD.life that

答案:D

5.harm vt.损害

纵向归纳法：

(1)harm vt.损害,对……有害

I have never harmed anybody.

(2)harm n. do harm to sb.=do sb.harm对……造成危害

The drought did a lot of harm to the crops.

(3)harmful adj.有害的

(4)harmless adj.无害的

联系语境法：

用harm的适当形式填空

(1)Follow the directions carefully，or this medicine may be________.

(2)The dog seems fierce，but It's________.

(3)I didn't want to do her any________;it could help it.

(4)Doctors say smoking________our health.

答案:(1)harmful (2)harmless (3)harm (4)harms

6.adapt…to…使……适应于……

纵向归纳法：

(1)adapt sth./sb.to sth./sb.

He has to adapt his speech to the interests of his audience.

(2)adapt oneself to…使自己适应……

We adapt ourselves to the hot weather.

(3)adapt to sth./sb.适应于……

The new teacher was very slow to adapt to the unusual rules of the school.

击破定式法：

Difficult books are sometimes adapted________use in schools.

A.for B.to

C.into D.at

答案:A adapt这里意思为 “改编”，for+n.表示目的。

7.devote A to B /doing B 把A投入与B中或做B这件事中

纵向归纳法：

(1)devote A to B

He has devoted his whole life to teaching.

He has devoted his whole life to the educational course.

(2)devote宾语可以为oneself

He has devoted himself to teaching.

(3)devoted过去分词;专心的,忠诚的,在句中作定语、宾语补足语。

I found the man very devoted to his wife.

横向比较法：

to为介词短语,要求后面用动名词、名词或代词作宾语。如:

look forward to盼望

lead to导致

stick to坚持

object to反对

be opposed to反对

turn to转向；翻到……页

refer to指的是

be used to习惯于

see to处理，注意

give way to向……让步

be equal to与……平等

be familiar to对……熟悉

be reduced to沦为……地步

击破定式法：

The day they looked forward to________at last.

A.coming B.comes

C.has come D.came

答案:D they look forward to是the day的定语从句,本句主语为the day,谓语动词为came。 8.explain vt.解释;说明

纵向归纳法：

(1)explain sth.to sb.

Please explain this rule to me.

(2)explain to sb.+从句

He explained to his father why he had stayed out so late.

（3）explain to sb.+特殊疑问词+to do sth.

Please explain to me where to begin and how to do it.

综合运用法：

改错:

He told to me that he would come a little late and explained me why he had to.

答案:去掉told与me之间的“to”,在explained后加上“to”。

9.be careful

纵向归纳法：

(1)be careful单独使用,当心

Be careful! The pan is hot!

(2)be careful about…

I hope you'll be careful in future about the things you say.

(3)be careful of…

We have to be careful of what they are doing.

(4)be careful with…

You must be more careful with your work.

有时be careful with表示吝啬。

He's too careful with his money;he never buys a drink for anyone.

(5)be careful not to do sth.小心不要做……

We want to be careful not to break anything.

(6)be careful+从句

Be careful what you do.

联系语境法：

改错:

You must be careful of Helen.She needs you now.

答案:of改为with。海伦需要你,因此你需要认真对待她。

10.nature n.

纵向归纳法：

横向比较法：

nature(自然),前无冠词,并无复数变化,有类似用法的名词还有:

man人类，

space太空，

society社会，

word消息

联系语境法：

在有必要的地方用冠词填空

(1)Children love to walk through the woods to observe________nature.

(2)She has________kind nature.

答案:(1)/ (2)a

●方法实践

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.Many people________in the past.

A.lead a hard life B.lived hard lives

C.lived a hard life D.lead a hard lives

2.The old man makes a living________selling newspapers.

A.on B.by

C.at D.over

3.The animals in________wild lead an active life.

A.a B.an

C.the D./

4.Here is a problem needing to________us.

A.explain B.be explained

C.be explained to D.explained by

5.I didn't know the________are dying________.

A.animals in danger;out B.dangerous animal;out

C.dangerous animals;away D.danger animals;out

6.The poor in the country need________.

A.cared for B.caring

C.to be careful with D.to be taken care of

7.The people who are out of work should________the new situation quickly.

A.adapt in B.adapt themselves to

C.be adapt at D.adapt

8.The teacher explained________the main points________a list of them.

A.them;by making B.to them;to make

C.them;to make D.to them;by making

9.You can easily find the great harm they do________.

A.to nature B.to the nature

C.at nature D.in nature

10.We must________to protect the________animals.

A.take measure;dangerous B.take steps;danger

C.take measures;endangered D.take step;endangering

11.We are sure to find out________of things________them.

A.the causes and effects;by studying

B.the causes and effect;by learning

C.the cause and effect;at studying

D.the cause and effect;in studying

12.Eskimos make their clothes from the________of seals.

A.furs B.hair

C.fur D.skin

13.A final solution________the problem was thought________at last.

A.of;of B.to;of

C.to;about D.of;out

14.People try to keep animals________.

A.becoming endangered B.being endanger

C.from being endangered D.both B and C

15.Don't tell it to anyone,________to my parents.

A.above all B.after all

C.in all D.first of all

16.It doesn't________ a great difference________ he comes or not.

A.make;if B.make;whether

C.show;if D.show;whether

17.After so many years，he remains a(an)________worker.

A.common B.usual

C.ordinary D.extraordinary

18.Although the working mother is very busy，she still________a lot of time to her children. A.devotes B.spends

C.offers D.provides

19.His parents died when she was only a small child，so she was________by her aunt.

A.grew up B.brought up

C.picked up D.taken up

20.It is necessary to use a short-wave to________all kinds of programmes.

A.turn up B.ask for

C.put on D.pick up

21.People often want to know what my job is.Often I________that question.

A.ask B.am asking

C.get asked D.get asking

22.Elephants would________ if men were allowed to shoot as many as they wished.

A.die down B.die out

C.die from D.die of

23.________word came that the new president was going to inspect(视察)our school.

A.A B.The

C.Some D./

24.The man is much________ his wife.

A.devoted to B.devoted at

C.devoting to D.devoting himself

25.In Hangzhou，Mr Green was so struck by________beauty of ________nature that he stayed for another night.

A./;/ B./;the

C.the;/ D.the;the

Ⅱ.完形填空

As Christmas is coming,there are presents to be bought,cards to be sent,and rooms to be cleaned.Parents are 1 with difficult jobs of hiding presents from curious young children.If the gifts are large,this is sometimes a real 2 .On Christmas Eve,young children find the excitement almost unbearable.They are torn between the wish to go to bed early so that Father Christmas will bring their presents quickly and the wish to 3 up late so that they will not 4 the fun.The wish for gifts usually proves stronger.But though children go to bed early,they often lie 5 for a long time,hoping to get a short 6 at Father Christmas.

Last Christmas,my wife and I 7 hid a few large presents in the storeroom.I 8 the moment when my son,Jimmy,would 9 me where that new bike had come from,but 10 he did not see it.

On Christmas Eve, 11 took the children hours to go to sleep.It must have been nearly 12

when my wife and I went quietly into their room and began 13 stockings.Then I pushed in the 14 I bought for Jimmy and left it beside the Christmas tree.We knew we would not get much sleep that night,for the children were 15 to get up early.At about five o'clock the next morning,we were 16 by loud sounds coming from the children's room-they were shouting excitedly! 17 I had time to get out of bed,young Jimmy came riding into the room on his new bike,and his sister,Mary,followed close behind pushing her new baby carriage. 18 the baby arrived.He moved 19 the hands and knees into the room dragging a large balloon behind him.Suddenly it burst.That woke us up 20 .The day had really begun with a band（巨响）!

1.A.faced B.met

C.filled D.pleased

2.A.question B.matter

C.problem D.business

3.A.get B.stay

C.stand D.wake

4.A.lose B.break

C.miss D.leave

5.A.awake B.wake

C.asleep D.sleep

6.A.look B.stare

C.glare D.watch

7.A.hopefully B.busily

C.gladly D.successfully

8.A.liked B.feared

C.surprised D.hated

9.A.answer B.tell

C.ask D.search

10.A.sadly B.unluckily

C.possibly D.fortunately

11.A.it B.they

C.I D.we

12.A.morning B.midnight

C.evening D.daybreak

13.A.filling B.sewing

C.mending D.preparing

14.A.present B.stocking

C.bike D.tree

15.A.going B.sure

C.glad D.excited

16.A.troubled B.frightened

C.woken D.shocked

17.A.Before B.After

C.Until D.Since

18.A.Even B.And

C.Soon D.Then

19.A.with B.on

C.over D.by

20.A.all B.nearly

C.happily D.completely

Ⅲ.短文改错

I used to love science class-all of them- 1.________

biology,chemistry,geography,physics.I think I 2.________

liked those classes because I felt that it helped me 3.________

understand what the world works.For example,when 4.________

I was a child,the rain was a mystery（奥秘）.In one 5.________

class,I learned it rained.I think science classes 6.________

clear up mysteries.But then there is always more 7.________

mysteries look into.What was my least favourite class? 8.________

That was maths.After learn the basics of the subject. 9.________

nothing else seemed very practically to me.I never 10.________

saw how I could use it in my daily life.

Ⅳ.书面表达

提示：你校学生会将为来访的美国朋友举办一个晚会，要在学校广播中宣布此事，并欢迎大家参加。为使美国朋友听懂，请你用英语写一篇广播通知。要点如下：

宗旨：欢迎来访的美国朋友

组织者：学生会

地点：主楼屋顶花园

活动内容：音乐、舞蹈、唱歌、游戏、交换小礼品（请包装好、签名并在包装外面写上几个祝愿词）

注意：1.广播稿约100词。

2.应包括以上要点，但不要逐字翻译，要组织成一篇通顺连贯的短文。

3.开头语已为你写好。

生词：交换礼品：to exchange gifts；学生会：the Student Union

May I have your attention,please?I have an announcement to make…

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习

1.Can you make sure ________ the gold ring?

A.where Alice had put B.where had Alice put

C.where Alice has put D.where has Alice put

2.You can't imagine ________ when they received these nice Christmas gifts.

A.how they were excited B.how excited they were

C.how excited they are D.they were how excited

3.John has a new car，I wonder when ________ it.

A.he got B.did he get

C.gets D.he is getting

4.I wonder how many years ago ________.

A.did your father retire B.your father retired

C.has your father retired D.your father has retired

5.What time do you think ________?

A.will Tom come here this morning

B.Tom will come here with John

C.is Tom coming here with John

D.can Tom get here this morning

6.Bob was never sure of ________ verbs of those were regular.

A.what B.that

C.if D.which

7.I'll eat ________ you give me.

A.that B.no matter that

C.whatever D.no matter which

8.These ancient Indians used to live in ________ is now a part of the United States.

A.where B.the place

C.which D.what

9.Can you tell me ________?

A.who is that woman B.who the woman is

C.whom is the woman D.that woman is

10.Jack said ________ to meet the American friends.

A.which he pleased B.he is pleased

C.that he was pleased D.what he was pleased

11.Lei Feng was always thinking of ________he could help others.

A.that B.how

C.whom D.which

12.-I believe ________ you've done your best and ________ things will improve.

-Thank you.

A.that;/ B./;/

C.what;what D./;that

13.The question he asked was ________ the electrical equipment should be stored.

A.what B.which

C.where D.because

14.These photographs will show you ________.

A.what our village looks like

B.what does our village look like

C.how our village looks like

D.how does our village look like

15.You can write about ________topic you like.

A.which B.whose

C.whatever D.no matter what

16.________ think will take care of the children?

A.Who you B.Who do you

C.Whom you D.Whom do you

17.He'd like to know what ________ today.

A.the weather looks B.does the weather look

C.the weather looks like D.does the weather look like

18.-Is that your watch?

-No，I can't tell ________.

A.whose is that watch B.whose that watch is

C.whose watch is that D.whose watch is

19.I want to know ________ the leather coat belong to.

A.whose B.which

C.that D.whom

20.I don't care ________they think of me.I'll do ________ I think right.

A.how;what B.what;how

C.what;what D.that;that

参考答案

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.C 过去时。

2.B by doing sth.通过做……。

3.C 固定短语:在野外。

4.C 被动语态与不定式混合应用。

5.A die out灭绝。

6.D

7.B adapt sb.to…使……适应于……。

8.D explain to sb.sth.。

9.A do harm to对……有危害;nature前无冠词。

10.C

11.A study研究。

12.C fur 不可数名词,指皮毛;skin 指表皮,皮肤。

13.B the solution to the problem这个问题的解决办法。

14.C 阻止……做……from不可以省略。

15.A 从重要性角度考虑。

16.B make a difference造成不同;It为形式主语, whether引导主语从句, if不可。

17.C 一位普通工人,用ordinary，常见的用common。

18.A devote…to…把……献给……。

19.B grow up不及物动词词组,不用被动语态。

20.D pick up接受电波。

21.C get asked=be asked。

22.B 灭绝。

23.D word为消息,前不接冠词。

24.A devoted to对……忠诚。

25.C 西湖的美景,特指;beauty前加the。

Ⅱ.完形填空

1.A 面临。

2.C 真正的问题。

3.B 固定词组，意为“熬夜”。

4.C 错过。

5.A 躺着不睡。

6.A 看一眼。

7.D 指把礼物藏好。

8.B 担心。

9.C 问。

10.D 幸运地是。

11.A it是形式主语，代替不定式to go to sleep。

12.B 半夜。

13.A 装满。

14.C 下文谈到，礼物是自行车，所以选C。

15.B 确信。

16.C 吵醒。

17.A 还没来得及。

18.A 就连小孩子也来了,even甚至。

19.B 爬着进了屋子。

20.D 彻底地，完全地

Ⅲ.短文改错

1.class→classes 2.√ 3.it→they 4.what→how 5.去掉the 6.在it前加why 7.is→are 8.在look前加to 9.learn→learning 10.practically→practical

Ⅳ.书面表达

May I have your attention,please?I have an announcement to make.The Student Union is going to hold a party on Saturday evening,August 15,to welcome our friends from the United States.The party will be held in the roof garden of the Main Building.It will begin at 7:30 p.m.There will be music,dancing,singing,games and exchange of gifts.Will everybody please bring along a small gift for this purpose?Remember to warp it up,sign your name and write a few words of good wishes.

Don't forget:7:30,Saturday evening,roof garden,Main Building.There's sure to be a lot of fun.Everybody is welcome.

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习

1.C 2.B 3.A 4.B 5.B

6.D of those表示范围;因此用which。

7.C whatever无论什么。

8.D 介词in后接宾语从句。

9.B 10.C 11.B

12.D 宾语从句为两个并列分句时,第二句的that不可省。

13.C 14.A 15.C

16.B do you think为插入语, will主语为who。

17.C 18.B

19.D 作“to”宾语;用宾格 “whom”。

20.C 句型what do you think of …征求对方意见。

篇20：unit 1 good friends(Period 1)(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

Teaching objectives and demands:

1. The activity is designed to encourage students to think about friends and friendship and to activate relevant vocabulary.

2. Ask the students to describe a good friend and give examples of situations where friends have helped them. Use the activity as a brainstorming session done either in groups or with the whole class.

3. Language use: Manipulate listening, speaking practice

Key points:

1. Everyday English for communication.

2. Words and useful expressions

Teaching procedures:

Step 1. Warming up

Students are asked to describe themselves and a friend. You can use these questions in at least two different ways. One alternative is to ask the students to think about three words to describe themselves and then let each student tell the class the three characteristics they have chosen. A second alternative would be to ask the students to write down the three characteristics and let other students guess who is being described. As with the first part, the objective is to elicit student language and get the students to think about friends and friendship.

Which words can be used to describe the characteristic?

Brave: courage fearless heroic

Scared : astonish fearful frightened horrified shocked terrified timid

Loyal: devoted faithful

Wise: bright clever cute gifted intelligent smart well-learned witty

Foolish: silly stupid

Beautiful: attractive breath-taking charming cool cute elegant eye-catching good-looking

graceful inviting lovely neat pretty splendid stunning

Rich: wealthy plentiful

Funning: amusing humorous

Happy: carefree cheerful contented delighted glad high merry pleased

Unhappy: bitter blue discouraged displeased heavy miserable sad upset

Step 2. Listening

The students will hear friends discuss common problems that may occur in a friendship. The students are asked to identify the problems and suggest solutions. Tell the students that friends sometimes have problems and that it is important to know how to solve the problems. The students will hear three arguments between friends and are asked to write down the problems and suggest possible solutions. It may be necessary to divide the task into two parts; first the students write down the problems as they listen to the tape, and then they discuss possible solutions. The students can also listen to one situation at a time and discuss solutions with the whole class.

Key

1. Peter is often late for football practice. I think that he should try to be on time in the future.

2. Mary usually borrows things without asking and she doesn’t return things on time. She should ask the owner is she wants to borrow something and try to return it on time in the future.

3. Adam borrowed John’s CD player yesterday and now it is broken. Adam can ask his uncle to fix it.

Extension the students are asked to think of other situations/problems involving friends and role-play or discuss the issues. You may also ask the students to list or discuss what methods are most effective when you want to solve problems in a friendship.

Workbook P85

Listening

a) Students will hear about problems friends may have and what can be done to solve such problems. The students are asked to write down the solutions mentioned on the tape and to think of other solutions. Ask the students to listen to the tape and write down the solutions suggested by the speaker. You can help the students prepare by first asking them to think about problems they may have had with their friends. The solutions mentioned on the tape are simple and general. Encourage the students to think of better, more specific solutions. What would they do if they had a quarrel with a friend? How do they talk to their friends about difficult things? How do they keep secrets from becoming rumours?

b) Listening text Everybody needs friends. But being a good friend can sometimes be hard work. Learning how to solve problems in a friendship can make you a better friend and a happier person. A common problem between friends is that they don’t know how to talk to each other about difficult things. When they do talk, they often get mad with each other. What can they do? Well, it takes time to learn how to communicate well, and it is important to understand why a friend gets angry with you when you say something. If you know what it is that makes your friend angry, then you can try to talk about the problem in a different way.

c) Another problem that many friends have to deal with is what to do after one of them gets angry or upset. If friends get angry with each other and say something bad because they are angry, they often find it difficult to apologize after the quarrel. The best way to apologize after a quarrel is simply to start by telling each other that you are sorry and then go from there. A simple apology is often enough and is a good starting point. What about friends who can’t keep a secret? Sometimes it seems impossible to keep a secret from becoming a rumour that everyone knows. Shouldn’t a good friend be able to keep a secret? Perhaps, but it is not always that easy to keep a secret, and telling a secret to someone will often put them in a difficult situation - they may have to lie to other friends to keep the secret. The best way to make sure that a secret doesn’t become a rumour is simply to keep it to yourself - don’t tell anyone.

d) Answers to Exercise 1

e) Problem: Friends get angry with each other when they try to talk about something difficult.

f) Solution: Try to understand your friend/Try to talk about the problem in a different way.

g) Problem: Friends don’t know how to apologize.

h) Solution: Start by telling each other that you are sorry and take it from there. A simple apology is often enough.

i) Problem: Some friends don’t know how to keep secrets.

Solution: Keep your secrets to yourself.

Step 3 Speaking

The students will use the information about the people on SB page 2 to talk about likes and dislikes and to practice giving reasons for their opinions. Tell the students to work in pairs. Ask the students to complete the chart on page SB page 3 and then use the answers to talk about who could be friends and what they like or dislike. Ask each pair to decide who could be friends and give reasons for their decisions. When they have made their decision, ask them to compare and debate their ideas with other pairs. Encourage different answers, including strange ones.

P3 work in pairs

Name John Steve Peter Ann Sarah Joe

Age 15 14 15 16 14

Gender boy boy boy girl girl boy

Likes football skiing singing dancing reading novels surfing the

reading singing rock music computers football Internet

reading computer rock music singing rock music

skiing

Dis- singing hiking football hiking rock music football

ikes computers football classical music dancing dancing hiking

rock music rock music dancing classical music computer

Extension The students are asked to make a list of famous people or people they know. The students then use the list to identify likes and dislikes and characteristics and try to determine who could be friends.

Step 4. Talking Workbook P85

The students are given role cards based on three situations where friends are having problems. They are asked to act out the situations with the “useful expressions”. They are also asked to think of a fourth situation, prepare role cards for it, and act it out. Let the students role-play in pairs. Remind them that they should not write down a dialogue and then simply read the dialogue. Instead, they should try to act out the situation without rehearsing it. If they find it difficult to get started, you can let them prepare by practising part of a situation. You can also help by modeling part of a situation.

Extension Friends often help each other. Ask the students to work in pairs and list examples of situations where friends can help each other. The students can then write role cards for the situations and act out in pairs.

Step 5. Homework

(1) Finish off the exercises of Unit1 in the workbook.

(2) Revise the key points of this unit.

(3)List the friend they get to know in class and write down some thing they want to know.

Evaluation of teaching:

阅读剩余 0%

本站所有文章资讯、展示的图片素材等内容均为注册用户上传(部分报媒/平媒内容转载自网络合作媒体)，仅供学习参考。用户通过本站上传、发布的任何内容的知识产权归属用户或原始著作权人所有。如有侵犯您的版权，请联系我们反馈本站将在三个工作日内改正。